Manual
Manual
VIPA System 200V
SM
Order No.: VIPA HB97E_SM
Rev. 06/29
Lerrzeichen
Manual VIPA System 200V
About this manual
The information contained in this manual is supplied without warranties.
The information is subject to change without notice.
© Copyright 2006 VIPA, Gesellschaft für Visualisierung und Prozessautomatisierung mbH
Ohmstraße 4, D-91074 Herzogenaurach,
Tel.: +49 (91 32) 744 -0
Fax.: +49 (91 32) 744-144
EMail: [email protected]
http://www.vipa.de
Hotline:
+49 (91 32) 744-114
All rights reserved
Disclaimer of
liability
The contents of this manual were verified with respect to the hard- and
software.
However, we assume no responsibility for any discrepancies or errors. The
information in this manual is verified on a regular basis and any required
corrections will be included in subsequent editions.
Suggestions for improvement are always welcome.
Trademarks
VIPA, System 100V, System 200V, System 300V and System 500V
are registered trademarks of VIPA Gesellschaft für Visualisierung und
Prozessautomatisierung mbH.
STEP und S7-300
are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.
Any other trademarks referred to in the text are the trademarks of the
respective owner and we acknowledge their registration.
Subject to change to cater for technical progress.
About this manual
Manual VIPA System 200V
About this manual
This manual describes the System 200V SM modules that are available
from VIPA. In addition to the product summary it contains detailed
descriptions of the different modules. You are provided with information on
the connection and the utilization of the System 200V SM modules. Every
chapter is concluded with the technical data of the respective module.
Overview
Chapter 1:
Basics
This introduction presents the VIPA System 200V as a centralized as well
as decentralized automation system.
The chapter also contains general information about the System 200V, i.e.
dimensions, installation and operating conditions.
Chapter 2:
Assembly and installation guidelines
This chapter provides all the information required for the installation and
the hook-up of a controller using the components of the System 200V.
Chapter 3-5:
Digital input/output modules
These chapters describe the digital remote I/O that is available from VIPA.
It provides all the information that is required for applications using these
modules. Chapter 13 contains information on the input modules, chapter 14
the information on the output modules and chapter 15 provides details on
input/output modules.
Chapter 6-8:
Analog input/output modules
These chapters contain a description of the analog remote I/O. The chapter
also provides all the information that is required for applications using each
module. Chapter 16 describes the input modules, chapter 17 the output
modules and chapter 18 the analog input/output modules that are available
from VIPA.
Subject to change to cater for technical progress.
Manual VIPA System 200V
Contents
Contents
User considerations ................................................................................. 1
Safety information .................................................................................... 2
Chapter 1
Basics .............................................................................. 1-1
Safety information for Users................................................................. 1-2
Overview .............................................................................................. 1-3
Components......................................................................................... 1-4
General description System 200V ........................................................ 1-5
Chapter 2
Assembly and installation guidelines............................ 2-1
Overview .............................................................................................. 2-2
Assembly.............................................................................................. 2-5
Wiring................................................................................................... 2-8
Assembly dimensions......................................................................... 2-10
Installation guidelines ......................................................................... 2-12
Chapter 3
Digital input modules...................................................... 3-1
System overview .................................................................................. 3-2
221-1BF00 - DI 8xDC 24V.................................................................... 3-4
221-1BF10 - DI 8xDC 24V 0.2ms ......................................................... 3-6
221-1BF20 - DIa 8xDC 24V.................................................................. 3-8
221-1BF30 - DI 8xDC 24V - ECO....................................................... 3-10
221-1BF50 - DI 8xDC 24V NPN ......................................................... 3-12
221-1FD00 - DI 4xAC/DC 90...230V................................................... 3-14
221-1FF20 - DI 8xAC/DC 60...230V ................................................... 3-16
221-1FF30 - DI 8xAC/DC 24...48V ..................................................... 3-18
221-1FF40 - DI 8xAC 240V ................................................................ 3-20
221-1FF50 - DI 8xAC/DC 180...265V ................................................. 3-22
221-1BH00 - DI 16xDC 24V with UB4x .............................................. 3-24
221-1BH10 - DI 16xDC 24V ............................................................... 3-26
221-1BH20 - DI 16xDC24V/1C........................................................... 3-28
221-1BH30 - DI 16xDC 24V - ECO .................................................... 3-38
221-1BH50 - DI 16xDC 24V NPN mit UB4x ....................................... 3-40
221-2BL10 - DI 32xDC 24V................................................................ 3-42
Chapter 4
Digital output modules ................................................... 4-1
System overview .................................................................................. 4-2
222-1BF00 - DO 8xDC 24V 1A ............................................................ 4-4
222-1BF10 - DO 8xDC 24V 2A ............................................................ 4-6
222-1BF20 - DO 8xDC 24V 2A separated 4 á 2................................... 4-8
222-1BF30 - DO 8xDC 24V 0.5A - ECO............................................. 4-10
222-1BH00 - DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A with UB4x .................................... 4-12
222-1BH10 - DO 16xDC 24V 1A ........................................................ 4-14
222-1BH20 - DO 16xDC 24V 2A ........................................................ 4-16
222-1BH30 - DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A - ECO .......................................... 4-18
222-1BH50 - DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A NPN............................................. 4-20
222-2BL10 - DO 32xDC 24V 1A......................................................... 4-22
222-1HF00 - DO 8xRelay COM.......................................................... 4-24
222-1HD10 - DO 4xRelay................................................................... 4-26
222-1HD20 - DO 4xRelay bistable ..................................................... 4-28
222-1FF00 - DO 8xSolid State COM .................................................. 4-30
222-1FD10 - DO 4xSolid State........................................................... 4-32
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
i
Contents
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 5
Digital input/output modules.......................................... 5-1
System overview .................................................................................. 5-2
Security hints for DIO modules............................................................. 5-2
223-1BF00 - DIO 8xDC 24V 1A ........................................................... 5-3
223-2BL10 - DI 16xDC 24V, DO 16xDC 24V 1A .................................. 5-5
Chapter 6
Analog input modules..................................................... 6-1
System overview .................................................................................. 6-2
General ................................................................................................ 6-3
231-1BD30 - AI 4x12Bit ±10V - ECO.................................................... 6-6
231-1BD40 - AI 4x12Bit 4...20mA, ±20mA - ECO .............................. 6-11
231-1BD52 - AI 4x16Bit, multiinput..................................................... 6-16
231-1BD53 - AI 4x16Bit, multiinput..................................................... 6-25
231-1BD60 - AI 4x12Bit, 4 ... 20mA, isolated ..................................... 6-39
231-1BD70 - AI 4x12Bit, ±10V, isolated ............................................. 6-42
231-1BF00 - AI 8x16Bit ...................................................................... 6-45
231-1FD00 - AI 4x16Bit f .................................................................... 6-55
Chapter 7
Analog output module .................................................... 7-1
System overview .................................................................................. 7-2
General ................................................................................................ 7-3
232-1BD30 - AO 4x12Bit ±10V, 0 ... 10V - ECO................................... 7-6
232-1BD40 - AO 4x12Bit, 0/4...20mA - ECO ...................................... 7-11
232-1BD51 - AO 4x12Bit, Multi-output ............................................... 7-16
Chapter 8
Analog input/output modules......................................... 8-1
System overview .................................................................................. 8-2
Security note for range allocation ......................................................... 8-2
General ................................................................................................ 8-3
234-1BD50 - AI 2/AO 2x12Bit - Multiin-/output ..................................... 8-4
234-1BD60 - AI 4/AO 2x12Bit - Multiin-/output ................................... 8-18
Chapter 9
SM 238C - Combination module .................................... 9-1
Overview .............................................................................................. 9-2
In-/Output part ...................................................................................... 9-3
Analog part........................................................................................... 9-4
Analog part - Project engineering ......................................................... 9-7
Analog part - Alarm and diagnostic .................................................... 9-13
Digital part .......................................................................................... 9-15
Digital part - Counter - Fast introduction............................................. 9-17
Digital part - Counter - Project engineering ........................................ 9-19
Digital part - Counter - Functions........................................................ 9-24
Digital part - Counter - Operating modes............................................ 9-26
Digital part - Counter - Additional functions ........................................ 9-31
Digital part - Counter - Alarm and diagnostic...................................... 9-37
Technical Data ................................................................................... 9-40
Appendix
..........................................................................................A-1
Index ....................................................................................................A-1
ii
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
User considerations
User considerations
Objective and
contents
This manual describes the modules that are suitable for use in the System
200V. It contains a description of the construction, project implementation
and the technical data.
Target audience
The manual is targeted at users who have a background in automation
technology.
Structure of the
manual
The manual consists of chapters. Every chapter provides a self-contained
description of a specific topic.
Guide to the
document
The following guides are available in the manual:
• an overall table of contents at the beginning of the manual
• an overview of the topics for every chapter
• an index at the end of the manual.
Availability
The manual is available in:
• printed form, on paper
• in electronic form as PDF-file (Adobe Acrobat Reader)
Icons
Headings
Important passages in the text are highlighted by following icons and
headings:
Danger!
Immediate or likely danger.
Personal injury is possible.
Attention!
Damages to property is likely if these warnings are not heeded.
Note!
Supplementary information and useful tips.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
1
Safety information
Manual VIPA System 200V
Safety information
Applications
conforming with
specifications
The System 200V is constructed and produced for:
• all VIPA System 200V components
• communication and process control
• general control and automation applications
• industrial applications
• operation within the environmental conditions specified in the technical
data
• installation into a cubicle
Danger!
This device is not certified for applications in
• in explosive environments (EX-zone)
Documentation
The manual must be available to all personnel in the
• project design department
• installation department
• commissioning
• operation
The following conditions must be met before using or commissioning
the components described in this manual:
• Modification to the process control system should only be carried out
when the system has been disconnected from power!
• Installation and modifications only by properly trained personnel
• The national rules and regulations of the respective country must be
satisfied (installation, safety, EMC ...)
Disposal
2
National rules and regulations apply to the disposal of the unit!
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 1 Basics
Chapter 1
Basics
Overview
The focus of this chapter is on the introduction of the VIPA System 200V.
Various options of configuring central and decentral systems are presented
in a summary.
The chapter also contains the general specifications of the System 200V,
i.e. dimensions, installation and environmental conditions.
Below follows a description of:
• Introduction of the System 200V
• General information, i.e. installation, operational safety and
environmental conditions
Content
Topic
Page
Basics .............................................................................. 1-1
Chapter 1
Safety information for Users................................................................. 1-2
Overview .............................................................................................. 1-3
Components......................................................................................... 1-4
General description System 200V ........................................................ 1-5
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
1-1
Chapter 1 Basics
Manual VIPA System 200V
Safety information for Users
Handling of
electrostatically
sensitive modules
VIPA modules make use of highly integrated components in MOStechnology. These components are extremely sensitive to over-voltages
that can occur during electrostatic discharges.
The following symbol is attached to modules that can be destroyed by
electrostatic discharges:
The symbol is located on the module, the module rack or on packing
material and it indicates the presence of electrostatic sensitive equipment.
It is possible that electrostatic sensitive equipment is destroyed by energies
and voltages that are far less than the human threshold of perception.
These voltages can occur where persons do not discharge themselves
before handling electrostatically sensitive modules and they can damage
components thereby, causing the module to become inoperable or
unusable. Modules that have been damaged by electrostatic discharges
may fail after a temperature change, mechanical shock or changes in the
electrical load.
Only the consequent implementation of protection devices and meticulous
attention to the applicable rules and regulations for handling the respective
equipment can prevent failures of electrostatically sensitive modules.
Shipping of
electrostatically
sensitive modules
Modules have to be shipped in the original packing material.
Measurements
and alterations on
electrostatically
sensitive modules
When you are conducting measurements on electrostatically sensitive
modules you should take the following precautions:
• Floating instruments must be discharged before use.
• Instruments must be grounded.
Modifying electrostatically sensitive modules you should only use soldering
irons with grounded tips.
Attention!
Personnel and instruments should be grounded when working on
electrostatically sensitive modules.
1-2
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 1 Basics
Overview
The System 200V
The System 200V is a modular automation system for centralized and
decentralized applications requiring low to medium performance
specifications. The modules are installed directly on a 35mm DIN rail. Bus
connectors inserted into the DIN rail provide the interconnecting bus.
The following figure illustrates the capabilities of the System 200V:
System 200V
decentral
central
DP 200V
Profibus
Interbus
CANopen
DeviceNet
PC 200V
SERCOS
Ethernet
PC-CPU
PLC 200V
PLC-CPU
PLC-CPU
for STEP®5 from Siemens
for STEP®7 from Siemens
Periphery
Dig. IN / Dig. OUT / Anal. IN / Anal. OUT / FM / CP / CM
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
1-3
Chapter 1 Basics
Manual VIPA System 200V
Components
Centralized
system
The System 200V series consists of a number of PLC-CPUs. These are
programmed in STEP5 or STEP7 from Siemens.
CPUs with integrated Ethernet interfaces or additional serial interfaces
simplify the integration of the PLC into an existing network or the
connection of additional peripheral equipment.
The application program is saved in Flash or an additional plug-in memory
module.
The PC based CPU 288 can be used to implement operating/monitoring
tasks, control applications or other file processing applications.
The modules are programmed in C++ or Pascal.
The PC 288-CPU provides an active interface to the backplane bus and
can therefore be employed as central controller for all peripheral and
function modules of the VIPA System 200V.
With the appropriate expansion interface the System 200V can support up
to 4 rows.
Decentralized
system
In combination with a Profibus DP master and slave the PLC-CPUs or the
PC-CPU form the basis for a Profibus-DP network in accordance with DIN
19245-3. The DP network can be configured with WinNCS VIPA
configuration tool res. Siemens SIMATIC Manager.
Other fieldbus systems may be connected by means of slaves for Interbus,
CANopen, DeviceNet, SERCOS and Ethernet.
Peripheral
modules
A large number of peripheral modules are available from VIPA, for example
digital as well as analog inputs/outputs, counter functions, displacement
sensors, positioners and serial communication modules.
These peripheral modules can be used in centralized as well as
decentralized mode.
Integration over
GSD File
The functionality of all VIPA system components are available via different
GSD-files.
For the Profibus interface is software standardized, we are able to
guarantee the full functionality by including a GSD-file using the Siemens
SIMATIC Manager.
For every system family there is an own GSD-file. Actual GSD files can be
found at ftp.vipa.de/support.
1-4
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 1 Basics
General description System 200V
Structure/
dimensions
• Standard 35mm DIN rail
• Peripheral modules with recessed labelling
• Dimensions of the basic enclosure:
1tier width: (HxWxD) in mm: 76x25.4x74 in inches: 3x1x3
2tier width: (HxWxD) in mm: 76x50.8x74 in inches: 3x2x3
Installation
Please note that you can only install header modules, like the CPU, the PC
and couplers into plug-in location 1 or 1 and 2 (for double width modules).
1
2
[1]
3
[2]
4
SM 221
IM 253 CAN
.0
RD
.1
BA
.2
.3
0 1
DC24V
+
-
2
3
.1
4
.2
5
.3
.4
6
.5
X 5
6 7
DI 8xDC24V
1
2
.0
3
.1
4
.2
5
.3
.4
6
7
.5
.6
8
.7
9
1
2
.0
2
3
.1
3
4
.2
4
5
.3
5
.4
6
.4
6
7
.5
7
.5
.6
8
.6
8
.6
.7
9
.7
9
.7
I0
X 2
3 4
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
1
.0
1
2
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
1
ER
ADR.
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
PW
I0
X 2
3 4
I0
X 2
3 4
7
8
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 253-1CA00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00
SM 221
PC 288
PW
D
V
M I
E
M
O
R
Y
RN
BA
M
O
U
S
E
K
B
D
OFF
D
C+
24 V
NET
X 2
3 4
VIPA 288-2BL10
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
C
O
M
1
ON
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
1
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
1
DI 8xDC24V
1
1
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.5
.6
8
.6
8
.6
8
.6
.7
9
.7
9
.7
9
.7
I0
X 2
3 4
I0
X 2
3 4
I0
X 2
3 4
7
8
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00
Clack
Header modules, like
PC, CPU, bus couplers (double width)
Header module
(single width)
Peripheral module
Guide rails
[3]
[4]
Note
A maximum of 32 modules can
be connected at the back
plane bus. Take attention that
here the maximum sum current of 3.5A is not exeeded.
Please install modules with a
high
current
consumption
directly beside the header
module.
Reliability
• Wiring by means of spring pressure connections (CageClamps) at the
front-facing connector, core cross-section 0.08...2.5mm2 or 1.5 mm2
(18pole plug)
• Complete isolation of the wiring when modules are exchanged
• Every module is isolated from the backplane bus
• ESD/Burst acc. IEC 61000-4-2 / IEC 61000-4-4 (to level 3)
• Shock resistance acc. IEC 60068-2-6 / IEC 60068-2-27 (1G/12G)
Environmental
conditions
•
•
•
•
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Operating temperature: 0 ... +60°C
Storage temperature: -25 ... +70°C
Relative humidity: 5 ... 95% without condensation
Ventilation by means of a fan is not required
1-5
Chapter 1 Basics
1-6
Manual VIPA System 200V
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
Chapter 2
Assembly and installation guidelines
Overview
This chapter contains the information required to assemble and wire a
controller consisting of Systems 200V components.
Below follows a description of:
• a general summary of the components
• steps required for the assembly and for wiring
• EMC guidelines for assembling the System 200V
Content
Topic
Page
Chapter 2
Assembly and installation guidelines............................ 2-1
Overview .............................................................................................. 2-2
Assembly.............................................................................................. 2-5
Wiring................................................................................................... 2-8
Assembly dimensions......................................................................... 2-10
Installation guidelines ......................................................................... 2-12
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
2-1
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
Manual VIPA System 200V
Overview
The modules are installed on a carrier rail. A bus connector provides interconnections between the modules. This bus connector links the modules
via the backplane bus of the modules and it is placed into the profile rail
that carries the modules.
Profile rail
You may use the following standard 35mm profile rail to mount the System
200V modules:
27 mm
Bus connector
15 mm
7,5 mm
35 mm
1 mm
35 mm
1,5 mm
General
27 mm
System 200V modules communicate via a backplane bus connector. The
backplane bus connector is isolated and available from VIPA in of 1-, 2-, 4or 8tier width.
The following figure shows a 1tier connector and a 4tier connector bus:
The bus connector is isolated and has to be inserted into the profile rail
until it clips in its place and the bus connections protrude from the rail.
2-2
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
The following figure shows the installation of a 4tier width bus connector in
a profile rail and the plug-in locations for the modules.
The different plug-in locations are defined by guide rails.
Profile rail
installation
1
2
[1]
3
[2]
[3]
[4]
4
IM 253 CAN
SM 221
SM 221
SM 221
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
DI 8xDC24V
DI 8xDC24V
DI 8xDC24V
PW
1
1
1
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
RD
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
BA
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.6
8
.6
8
.6
8
.6
8
.7
9
.7
9
.7
9
.7
0 1
ADR.
DC24V
X 5
6 7
1
ER
+
-
I0
1
2
X 2
3 4
I0
X 2
3 4
I0
X 2
3 4
Header module,
like PC, CPU,
bus coupler, if
double width
Header module
(single width)
Peripheral module
Guide rails
Note
A maximum of 32 modules
can be connected at the
back plane bus.
Take attention that here the
maximum sum current of
3.5A is not exceeded.
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 253-1CA00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00
PC 288
PW
D
V
M I
E
M
O
R
Y
K
B
D
RN
BA
NET
SM 221
SM 221
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
DI 8xDC24V
DI 8xDC24V
1
C
O
M
1
M
O
U
S
E
OFF
X 2
3 4
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
D
C+
24 V
VIPA 288-2BL10
Assembly regarding
the current
consumption
ON
1
1
2
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.6
8
.6
8
.6
8
.6
8
.7
9
.7
9
.7
9
.7
I0
X 2
3 4
1
.0
I0
X 2
3 4
I0
X 2
3 4
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00
• Use bus connectors as long as possible.
• Sort the modules with a high current consumption right beside the
header module. At ftp.vipa.de/manuals/system200v a list of current
consumption of every System 200V module can be found.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
2-3
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
Assembly horizontal
respectively vertical
Manual VIPA System 200V
You may install the System 200V as well horizontal as vertical. Please
regard the allowed environment temperatures:
• horizontal structure:
from 0 to 60°
• vertical structure:
from 0 to 40°
The horizontal structure always starts at the left side with a header module
(CPU, bus coupler, PC), then you plug-in the peripheral modules beside to
the right. You may plug-in maximum 32 peripheral modules.
Header module
SM 221
SM 221
CPU 216
DI 8xDC24V
DI 8xDC24V
RN
ST
MR
R
I/O Periphery
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
1
1
1
1
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
PW
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
SF
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.6
8
.6
8
.6
8
.6
8
.7
9
.7
9
.7
9
.7
S
MMC
FC
MC
M
2
P
I
X1
DC
24V
X 2
3 4
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
+
-
2
X 2
3 4
I0
I0
I0
1
X 2
3 4
X 2
3 4
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 216-2BA01 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00
7
8
9
.5
.6
.7
X 2
3 4
6
.4
7
8
9
.5
.6
.7
7
8
9
.5
.6
.7
2
1
X1
M
2
P
I
X 2
3 4
6
.4
FC
I0
5
.3
SF
4
.2
PW
X 2
3 4
6
.4
I0
5
.3
.2
4
X 2
3 4
5
.3
I0
4
.2
3
.1
3
.1
3
.1
+
X 2
3 4
DC
24V
MC
MMC
VIPA 216-2BA01 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00 VIPA 221-1BF00
9
8
I0
.7
6
5
4
3
2
7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
2
1
.0
2
1
.0
2
1
RN
ST
MR
R
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
CPU 216
.0
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
I/O Periphery
Header
module
CPU
2-4
S
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
1
The vertical structure is turned for 90° against the clock.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
Assembly
60 mm
80 mm
Please follow these rules during the assembly!
• Turn off the power supply before you insert or remove any modules!
• Make sure that a clearance of at least 60mm exists above and 80mm
below the middle of the bus rail.
• Every row must be completed from left to right and it has to start with a
header module (PC, CPU, and bus coupler).
1
2
3
[1]
[2]
4
[3]
[4]
Header module,
like PC, CPU, bus
coupler, if double
width
Header module
(single width)
Peripheral module
Guide rails
• Modules are to install adjacent to each other. Gaps are not permitted
between the modules since this would interrupt the backplane bus.
• A module is only installed properly and connected electrically when it
has clicked into place with an audible click.
• Plug-in locations after the last module may remain unoccupied.
Note!
A maximum of 32 modules can be connected at the back plane bus. Take
attention that here the maximum sum current of 3.5A is not exceeded.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
2-5
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
Assembly
procedure
Manual VIPA System 200V
The following sequence represents the assembly procedure as viewed
from the side.
• Install the profile rail. Make sure that a clearance of at least 60mm exists
above and 80mm below the middle of the bus rail.
➡
• Press the bus connector into the rail until it clips securely into place and
the bus-connectors protrude from the profile rail. This provides the basis
for the installation of your modules.
➡
• Start at the outer left location with the installation of your header module
like CPU, PC or bus coupler and install the peripheral modules to the
right of this.
1
2
3
[1]
➡
[2]
4
[3]
[4]
Header module
like PC, CPU, bus
coupler
Header module
when this is a
double width or a
peripheral module
Peripheral module
Guide rails
➡
• Insert the module that you are installing into the profile rail at an angle of
45 degrees from the top and rotate the module into place until it clicks
into the profile rail with an audible click. The proper connection to the
backplane bus can only be guaranteed when the module has properly
clicked into place.
Attention!
Power must be turned off before modules are
installed or removed!
Clack
2-6
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Removal
procedure
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
The following sequence shows the steps required for the removal of
modules in a side view.
• The enclosure of the module has a spring-loaded clip at the bottom by
which the module can be removed from the rail.
• Insert a screwdriver into the slot as shown.
➡
• The clip is unlocked by pressing the screwdriver in an upward direction.
➡
• Withdraw the module with a slight rotation to the top.
➡
➡
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Attention!
Power must be turned off before modules are
installed or removed!
Please remember that the backplane bus is
interrupted at the point where the module was
removed!
2-7
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring
Outline
Most peripheral modules are equipped with a 10pole or an 18pole
connector. This connector provides the electrical interface for the signaling
and supply lines of the modules.
The modules carry spring-clip connectors for the interconnections and
wiring.
The spring-clip connector technology simplifies the wiring requirements for
signaling and power cables.
In contrast to screw terminal connections, spring-clip wiring is vibration
proof. The assignment of the terminals is contained in the description of the
respective modules.
2
2
You may connect conductors with a diameter from 0.08mm up to 2.5mm
2
(max. 1.5mm for 18pole connectors).
The following figure shows a module with a 10pole connector.
Pin no.
Round aperture
for wires
Rectangular opening
for screwdriver
Pin no.
Note!
The spring-clip is destroyed if you insert the screwdriver into the opening
for the hook-up wire!
Make sure that you only insert the screwdriver into the square hole of the
connector!
2-8
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
Wiring procedure
• Install the connector on the module until it locks with an audible click.
For this purpose you press the two clips together as shown.
The connector is now in a permanent position and can easily be wired.
The following section shows the wiring procedure from above.
• Insert a screwdriver at an angel into the square opening as shown.
• Press and hold the screwdriver in the opposite direction to open the
contact spring.
• Insert the stripped end of the hook-up wire into the round opening. You
can use wires with a diameter of 0.08mm2 to 2.5mm2 (1.5mm2 for
18pole connectors).
• When you remove the screwdriver, the wire is clipped securely.
Wire the power supply connections first
followed by the signal cables (inputs and outputs).
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
2-9
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
Manual VIPA System 200V
Assembly dimensions
Overview
Here follow all the important dimensions of the System 200V.
Dimensions
Basic enclosure
1tier width (HxWxD) in mm: 76 x 25.4 x 74
2tier width (HxWxD) in mm: 76 x 50.8 x 74
60 mm
80 mm
Installation
dimensions
Installed and
wired dimensions
85 mm
mm
84
74 mm
76 mm
76,62
mm
24
2,77mm
cm
In- / Output
modules
88 mm
ca. 110 mm
2-10
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
89 mm
mm
88
Function modules
85 mm
84,46
mm
768 mm
cm
24
27 mm
11
mm
4,66
mm
CPUs here with
EasyConn from
VIPA
91mm
mm
89
85 mm
65 mm
cm
768mm
24
27 mm
mm
11 mm
5 mm
12 cm
125
mm
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
2-11
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
Manual VIPA System 200V
Installation guidelines
General
The installation guidelines contain information on the proper assembly of
System 200V. Here we describe possible ways of interference that may
disturb the controlling system and how you have to approach shielding and
screening issues to ensure the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
What is EMC?
The term "electromagnetic compatibility" (EMC) refers to the ability of an
electrical device to operate properly in an electromagnetic environment
without interference from the environment or without the device causing
illegal interference to the environment.
All System 200V components were developed for applications in harsh
industrial environments and they comply with EMC requirements to a large
degree. In spite of this you should implement an EMC strategy before
installing any components which should include any possible source of
interference.
Possible sources
for disturbances
Electromagnetic interference can enter your system in many different ways:
• Fields
• I/O signal lines
• Bus system
• Power supply
• Protective conductor
Interference is coupled into your system in different ways, depending in the
propagation medium (conducted or not) and the distance to the source of
the interference.
We differentiate between:
• galvanic coupling
• capacitive coupling
• inductive coupling
• radiated power coupling
2-12
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
The most
important rules for
ensuring EMC
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
In many cases, adherence to a set of very elementary rules is sufficient to
ensure EMC. For this reason we wish to advise you to heed the following
rules when you are installing your controllers.
• During the installation of your components you have to ensure that any
inactive metal components are grounded via a proper large-surface
earth.
- Install a central connection between the chassis ground and the
earthing/protection system.
- Interconnect any inactive metal components via low-impedance
conductors with a large cross-sectional area.
- Avoid aluminum components. Aluminum oxidizes easily and is
therefore not suitable for grounding purposes.
• Ensure that wiring is routed properly during installation.
- Divide the cabling into different types of cable. (Heavy current,
power supply, signal and data lines).
- Install heavy current lines and signal or data lines in separate
channeling or cabling trusses.
- Install signaling and data lines as close as possible to any metallic
ground surfaces (e.g. frames, metal rails, sheet metal).
• Ensure that the screening of lines is grounded properly.
- Data lines must be screened.
- Analog lines must be screened. Where low-amplitude signals are
transferred, it may be advisable to connect the screen on one side
of the cable only.
- Attach the screening of cables to the ground rail by means of large
surface connectors located as close as possible to the point of
entry. Clamp cables mechanically by means of cable clamps.
- Ensure that the ground rail has a low-impedance connection to the
cabinet/cubicle.
- Use only metallic or metallized covers for the plugs of screened
data lines.
• In critical cases you should implement special EMC measures.
- Connect snubber networks to all inductive loads that are controlled by System 200V modules.
- Use incandescent lamps for illumination purposes inside cabinets
or cubicles, do not use fluorescent lamps.
• Create a single reference potential and ensure that all electrical equipment is grounded wherever possible.
- Ensure that earthing measures are implemented effectively. The controllers are earthed to provide protection and for functional reasons.
- Provide a star-shaped connection between the plant, cabinets/cubicles of the System 200V and the earthing/protection system. In this
way you avoid ground loops.
- Where potential differences exist you must install sufficiently large
equipotential bonding conductors between the different parts of the
plant.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
2-13
Chapter 2 Assembly and installation guidelines
Screening of
cables
Manual VIPA System 200V
The screening of cables reduces the influence of electrical, magnetic or
electromagnetic fields; we talk of attenuation.
The earthing rail that is connected conductively to the cabinet diverts
interfering currents from screen conductors to ground. It is essential that
the connection to the protective conductor is of low-impedance as the
interfering currents could otherwise become a source of trouble in themselves.
The following should be noted when cables are screened:
• Use cables with braided screens wherever possible.
• The coverage of the screen should exceed 80%.
• Screens should always be grounded at both ends of cables. High
frequency interference can only be suppressed by grounding cables on
both ends.
Grounding at one end may become necessary under exceptional circumstances. However, this only provides attenuation to low frequency
interference. One-sided earthing may be of advantage where:
- it is not possible to install equipotential bonding conductors.
- analog signals (in the mV or µA range) are transferred.
- foil-type shields (static shields) are used.
• Always use metallic or metallized covers for the plugs on data lines for
serial links. Connect the screen of the data line to the cover. Do not
connect the screen to PIN 1 of the plug!
• In a stationary environment it is recommended that the insulation is
stripped from the screened cable interruption-free and to attach the
screen to the screening/protective ground rail.
• Connect screening braids by means of metallic cable clamps. These
clamps need a good electrical and large surface contact with the screen.
• Attach the screen of a cable to the grounding rail directly where the
cable enters the cabinet/cubicle. Continue the screen right up to the
System 200V module but do not connect the screen to ground at this
point!
Please heed the following when you assemble the system!
Where potential differences exist between earthing connections it is possible that an equalizing current could be established where the screen of a
cable is connected at both ends.
Remedy: install equipotential bonding conductors
2-14
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Chapter 3
Digital input modules
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the construction and the operating of
the VIPA digital input modules.
Below follows a description of:
• A system overview of the digital input modules
• Properties
• Constructions
• Interfacing and schematic diagram
• Technical data
Contents
Topic
Page
Chapter 3
Digital input modules...................................................... 3-1
System overview .................................................................................. 3-2
221-1BF00 - DI 8xDC 24V.................................................................... 3-4
221-1BF10 - DI 8xDC 24V 0.2ms ......................................................... 3-6
221-1BF20 - DIa 8xDC 24V.................................................................. 3-8
221-1BF30 - DI 8xDC 24V - ECO....................................................... 3-10
221-1BF50 - DI 8xDC 24V NPN ......................................................... 3-12
221-1FD00 - DI 4xAC/DC 90...230V................................................... 3-14
221-1FF20 - DI 8xAC/DC 60...230V ................................................... 3-16
221-1FF30 - DI 8xAC/DC 24...48V ..................................................... 3-18
221-1FF40 - DI 8xAC 240V ................................................................ 3-20
221-1FF50 - DI 8xAC/DC 180...265V ................................................. 3-22
221-1BH00 - DI 16xDC 24V with UB4x .............................................. 3-24
221-1BH10 - DI 16xDC 24V ............................................................... 3-26
221-1BH20 - DI 16xDC24V/1C........................................................... 3-28
221-1BH30 - DI 16xDC 24V - ECO .................................................... 3-38
221-1BH50 - DI 16xDC 24V NPN mit UB4x ....................................... 3-40
221-2BL10 - DI 32xDC 24V................................................................ 3-42
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
3-1
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
System overview
Here follows a summary of the digital input modules that are currently
available from VIPA:
Input modules
SM 221
SM 221
SM 221
SM 221
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
DI 8xDC24V 0,2ms
DIa 8xDC24V
DI 8xDC24V
1
1
1
1
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.6
8
.6
.7
9
.7
8
.6
8
.6
9
.7
9
.7
9
I0
I0
I0
VIPA 221-1BF00
VIPA 221-1BF10
VIPA 221-1BF20
VIPA 221-1BF30
X 2
3 4
SM 221
SM 221
DI
DI 4xAC/DC..230V
8xDC24V 0,2ms
1
.0
2
.1
X 2
3 4
X 2
3 4
X 2
3 4
DI 8xDC24V NPN
SM 221
SM 221
DI 8xAC/..230V
DI 8xAC/..48V
1
1
1
.0
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
3
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.2
4
.2
.1
4
.2
4
.2
4
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.4
6
.2
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.5
7
7
.5
7
.5
7
.5
.6
8
.6
.3
8
.6
8
.6
.7
9
.7
9
.7
9
.7
9
I0
I0
N
I0
N
I0
VIPA 221-1BF50
VIPA
VIPA 221-1FD00
221-1BF10
X 2
3 4
X 2
3 4
XX 22
33 44
SM 221
SM 221
DI 8xAC240V
DI 8xAC/DC..265V
1
VIPA 221-1FF30
SM 221
n
DI 16xDC24V
DI 16xDC24V
2
.0
2
.1
3
.1
3
.2
4
.2
4
.3
5
.3
5
.4
6
.4
6
.5
7
.5
7
.6
8
.6
8
.7
9
.7
9
N
I0
N
I0
X 2
3 4
X 2
3 4
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1FF40
VIPA 221-1FF50
DI 16xDC24V/2C
+0
+1
VIPA 221-1BH20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
n+1
VIPA 221-1BH30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
n+1
VIPA 221-1BH00
SM 221
DI 16xDC24V
n
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1
.0
8
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1FF20
X1
3-2
8
I0
DI 16xDC24V
VIPA 221-1BH10
n
SM 221
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
X1
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1BH50
n+1
VIPA 221-2BL10
X 2
3 4
DI 32xDC24V
n+2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
n+3
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Order data
input modules
Type
DI 8xDC 24V
DI 8xDC 24V 0.2ms
DIa 8xDC 24V
DI 8xDC 24V - ECO
DI 8xDC 24V NPN
DI 4xAC/DC 90...230V
DI 8xAC/DC 60...230V
DI 8xAC/DC 24...48V
DI 8xAC 240V
DI 8xAC/DC 180...265V
DI 16xDC 24V with UB4x
DI 16xDC 24V
DI 16xDC 24V/1C
DI 16xDC 24V - ECO
DI 16xDC 24V NPN with UB4x
DI 32xDC 24V
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Order number
VIPA 221-1BF00
VIPA 221-1BF10
VIPA 221-1BF20
VIPA 221-1BF30
VIPA 221-1BF50
VIPA 221-1FD00
VIPA 221-1FF20
VIPA 221-1FF30
VIPA 221-1FF40
VIPA 221-1FF50
VIPA 221-1BH00
VIPA 221-1BH10
VIPA 221-1BH20
VIPA 221-1BH30
VIPA 221-1BH50
VIPA 221-2BL10
Page
3-4
3-6
3-8
3-10
3-12
3-14
3-16
3-18
3-20
3-22
3-24
3-26
3-28
3-38
3-40
3-42
3-3
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1BF00 - DI 8xDC 24V
Order data
DI 8xDC 24V
VIPA 221-1BF00
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. The module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate the
status of the channel.
Properties
•
•
•
•
8 floating inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V nominal input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
Label for module description
Label for the bit address
with description
LED status indicator
Connector edge
[3]
[4]
2
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+0.7
A "1" signal level is
recognized as of app.
15V and the respective
LED is turned on
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
I0
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
not connected
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.1
Input I+0.2
Input I+0.3
Input I+0.4
Input I+0.5
Input I+0.6
Input I+0.7
Ground
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1BF00
3-4
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input module
2
3
4
LED
Optocoupler
24V DC
5
24V DC
6
V-Bus
7
Mintern
8
9
10
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1BF00
8
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
3ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
25mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-5
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1BF10 - DI 8xDC 24V 0.2ms
Order data
DI 8xDC 24V 0.2ms
VIPA 221-1BF10
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process level and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. The
module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate the
status of the channel.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
8 floating inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
Delay time 0.2ms
DC 24V nominal input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
[3]
[4]
2
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+0.7
A "1" signal level is
recognized as of app. 15V
and the respective LED is
turned on
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V 0,2ms
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
I0
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
not connected
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.1
Input I+0.2
Input I+0.3
Input I+0.4
Input I+0.5
Input I+0.6
Input I+0.7
Ground
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1BF10
3-6
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input module
2
3
4
LED
Optocoupler
24V DC
5
24V DC
6
V-Bus
7
Mintern
8
9
10
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1BF10
8
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
0.2ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
25mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-7
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1BF20 - DIa 8xDC 24V
Order data
DIa 8xDC 24V
Description
The digital alarm input module accepts the binary control signals from the
process level and provides an electrically isolated interface to the central
bus system.
All inputs are configurable as alarms. With the rising edge of the input, the
alarm is activated. The alarm calls the OB 40 in the CPU. If this OB isn't
available, the OB 85 is called. If this OB is also not programmed, the CPU
switches to STOP.
The module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate
the status of the channel.
Properties
•
•
•
•
Construction
VIPA 221-1BF20
8 alarm inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
nominal input voltage DC 24V
suited for urgent signals (switches and proximity switches)
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
1
2
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
[3]
[4]
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
not connected
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.1
Input I+0.2
Input I+0.3
Input I+0.4
Input I+0.5
Input I+0.6
Input I+0.7
Ground
SM 221
DIa 8xDC24V
.0... .7
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+0.7
A "1" signal level is
recognized as of app.
15V and the respective
LED is turned on
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1BF20
3-8
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input module
2
3
4
LED
Optocoupler
24V DC
5
24V DC
6
V-Bus
7
Mintern
8
9
10
M
Note!
The module may be deployed in the System 200V starting from CPU
firmware versions:
CPU 21x:
CPU 24x:
Version 2.2.1
Version 3.0.6
The deployment with lower firmware versions causes error messages and
a CPU switch to STOP!
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of alarm inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1BF20
8
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
3ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
25mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-9
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1BF30 - DI 8xDC 24V - ECO
Order data
DI 8xDC 24V
VIPA 221-1BF30
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. The module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate the
status of the channel.
Properties
•
•
•
•
8 floating inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V nominal input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
Label for module description
Label for the bit address
with description
LED status indicator
Connector edge
[3]
[4]
2
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+0.7
A "1" signal level is
recognized as of app.
15V and the respective
LED is turned on
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
I0
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
not connected
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.1
Input I+0.2
Input I+0.3
Input I+0.4
Input I+0.5
Input I+0.6
Input I+0.7
Ground
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1BF30
3-10
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input module
2
3
4
LED
Optocoupler
24V DC
5
24V DC
6
V-Bus
7
Mintern
8
9
10
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1BF30
8
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
3ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
25mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-11
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1BF50 - DI 8xDC 24V NPN
Order data
DI 8xDC 24V NPN
VIPA 221-1BF50
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. The
module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate the
status of the channel. The input becomes active when it is connected to
ground.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
8 floating inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
Active low input (signal level ”1” when input is at ground)
DC 24V nominal input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
[3]
[4]
2
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+0.7
when an input is at ground
a "1" is detected and the
respective LED is turned
on
SM 221
DI 8xDC24V
L+
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
I0
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+DC 24V
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.1
Input I+0.2
Input I+0.3
Input I+0.4
Input I+0.5
Input I+0.6
Input I+0.7 / Ground
reserved
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1BF50
3-12
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input module
2
3
LED
4
Optocoupler
-
24V DC
+
5
+
24V DC
-
6
V-Bus
Mintern
7
8
9
10
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1BF50
8
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
15 ... 28.8V
0 ... 5V
3ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
25mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-13
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1FD00 - DI 4xAC/DC 90...230V
Order data
DI 4xAC/DC 90...230V
VIPA 221-1FD00
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system.
The module has 4 channels and the respective status is displayed by
means of LEDs.
Properties
• 4 floating inputs, isolated from the backplane bus and from each other
• Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
• Nominal input voltage 90 ... 230V AC/DC
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
[3]
[4]
2
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0
.1
.2
.3
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+0.3
from app. DC 80V or AC
65V (50Hz) a signal "1"
is detected and the
respective LED is turned
on
SM 221
DI 4xAC/DC..230V
1
.0
2
3
.1
4
5
.2
6
7
.3
8
9
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
not connected
I+0.0
Neutral conductor I+0.0
I+0.1
Neutral conductor I+0.1
I+0.2
Neutral conductor I+0.2
I+0.3
Neutral conductor I+0.3
not connected
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1FD00
3-14
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Wiring diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Schematic diagram
1
Input module
2
3
Optocoupler
AC/DC 90 ... 230V
4
V-Bus
LED
5
6
Mintern
7
8
9
10
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Frequency of input voltage
Input resistance
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1FD00
4
AC/DC 90 ... 230V
AC/DC 0 ... 35V
AC/DC 90 ... 230V
25ms
50 ... 60Hz
136kΩ
DC 5V via backplane bus
40mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte (Bit 0 ... Bit 3)
25.4x76x88
50g
3-15
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1FF20 - DI 8xAC/DC 60...230V
Order data
DI 8xAC/DC 60...230V
VIPA 221-1FF20
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system.
The module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate
the status of the channel.
Properties
• 8 inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
• Nominal input voltage 60 ... 230V AC/DC
• Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
[3]
[4]
2
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+0.7
from app. DC 55V or AC
45V (50Hz) a signal "1" is
detected and the
respective LED is turned
on
SM 221
DI 8xAC/DC..230V
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
N
I0
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
not connected
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.1
Input I+0.2
Input I+0.3
Input I+0.4
Input I+0.5
Input I+0.6
Input I+0.7
Neutral conductor
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1FF20
3-16
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input module
2
3
4
Optocoupler
AC/DC 60 ... 230V
5
6
AC/DC 60...230V
LED
V-Bus
7
Mintern
8
9
10
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Frequency of input voltage
Input resistance
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1FF20
8
AC/DC 60 ... 230V
AC/DC 0 ... 35V
AC/DC 60 ... 230V
25ms
50 ... 60Hz
136kΩ
DC 5V via backplane bus
60mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-17
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1FF30 - DI 8xAC/DC 24...48V
Order data
DI 8xAC/DC 24...48V
VIPA 221-1FF30
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system.
The module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate
the status of the channel.
Properties
• 8 floating inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
• Nominal input voltage AC/DC 24 ... 48V
• Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
[3]
[4]
2
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+0.7
from app. DC 14V or AC
12V (50Hz) a signal "1" is
detected and the
respective LED is turned
on
SM 221
DI 8xAC/DC..48V
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
N
I0
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
not connected
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.1
Input I+0.2
Input I+0.3
Input I+0.4
Input I+0.5
Input I+0.6
Input I+0.7
Neutral conductor
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1FF30
3-18
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input module
2
3
4
Optocoupler
AC/DC 24...48V
5
6
AC/DC 24...48V
LED
V-Bus
7
Mintern
8
9
10
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Frequency of input voltage
Input resistance
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1FF30
8
AC/DC 24 ... 48V
AC/DC 0 ... 8V
AC/DC 18 ... 48V
25ms
50 ... 60Hz
16.4kΩ
DC 5V via backplane bus
60mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-19
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1FF40 - DI 8xAC 240V
Order data
DI 8xAC 240V
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system.
The module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate
the status of the channel.
In a defined voltage range, the signal state of the respective input is not
modified (Hysterese).
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
Construction
VIPA 221-1FF40
8 floating inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
Nominal input voltage AC 240V
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
Hysterese
Current consumption 20mA per channel
[1]
[2]
1
2
[3]
[4]
3
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
not connected
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.1
Input I+0.2
Input I+0.3
Input I+0.4
Input I+0.5
Input I+0.6
Input I+0.7
Neutral conductor
SM 221
.0... .7
DI 8xAC240V
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+0.7
from app. AC 190 V
(50Hz) the signal "1" is
detected and the
respective LED is turned
on
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
N
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1FF40
3-20
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input-Module
2
3
4
Optocoupler
AC 240V
5
AC 240V
6
LED
V-Bus
7
Mintern
8
9
10
M
Note!
This module is specified for voltages of max. AC 260V.
If inductive loads occur on the network, this load has to be filtered either
directly at the module or at the according device, for example by using a
snubber network.
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Current consumption per channel
Signal voltage "0"
Hysterese
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Frequency of input voltage
Input resistance
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1FF40
8
AC 240V
20mA
AC 0 ...70V
AC 90 ... 160V
AC 190 ... 260V
25ms
50Hz
136kΩ
DC 5V via backplane bus
60mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
ca. 50g
3-21
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1FF50 - DI 8xAC/DC 180...265V
Order data
DI 8xAC/DC 180...265V
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system.
The module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate
the status of the channel.
Properties
• 8 floating inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
• Nominal input voltage AC/DC 180...265V
• Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
Construction
VIPA 221-1FF50
[1]
[2]
1
2
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
[3]
[4]
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+0.7
from app. DC 150V resp.
AC 170V (50Hz) the signal
"1" is detected and the
respective LED is turned
on
SM 221
DI 8xAC/DC..265V
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
N
I0
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
not connected
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.1
Input I+0.2
Input I+0.3
Input I+0.4
Input I+0.5
Input I+0.6
Input I+0.7
Neutral conductor
X 2
3 4
VIPA 221-1FF50
3-22
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input module
2
3
4
Optocoupler
AC/DC
180 ... 265V
5
AC/DC
6
LED
V-Bus
180...265V
7
Mintern
8
9
10
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Frequency of input voltage
Input resistance
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1FF50
8
AC/DC 180...265V
AC/DC 0 ...150V
AC/DC 180 ... 265V
25ms
50 ... 60Hz
136kΩ
DC 5V via backplane bus
80mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-23
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1BH00 - DI 16xDC 24V with UB4x
Order data
DI 16xDC 24V
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. This
module requires a UB4x-converter. It has 16 channels that indicate the
respective status via LEDs on the UB4x. The module has to be connected
to the converter module (DEA-UB4x) by means of a flattened round cable
(DEA-KB91C).
Properties
•
•
•
•
Construction
VIPA 221-1BH00
16 inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V nominal input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of a LED located on the
conversion module UB4x
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
2
Label for module description
Clip
Recessed connector for the
interface to a conversion
module UB4x via the
flattened round cable
Clip
3
[4]
4
Status indicator on UB4x
LED
Description
0... .15
L+ L-
3-24
LEDs (yellow)
I+0.0 to I+0.7 High
I+0.0 to I+0.7 Low
A "1" signal level is
recognized as of app.
15V and the respective
LED is turned on
LED (green)
Supply voltage available
Pin assignment module
Pin
Connector
Assignment
26
25
23...26
22
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
14
4
3
2
1
Supply voltage
+DC 24V
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.7
Input I+1.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
1...6
Input I+1.7
Supply voltage Ground
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Interface to UB4x
DI 16x
Schematic diagram module
Input module
UB4x
LL+
LED
DEA-KB89 or
DEA-KB91
M24
LED
.00
Optocoupler
24V DC
0
V-Bus
25
Mintern
.7
.7
High Low
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
+24V
VIPA 221-1BH00
16
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
3ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
35mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the UB4x
2Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-25
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1BH10 - DI 16xDC 24V
Order data
DI 16xDC 24V
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. It has
16 channels that indicate the respective status by means of LEDs.
Properties
•
•
•
•
Construction
VIPA 221-1BH10
16 inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V nominal input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
Label for module description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
Status indicator
connector
assignment
LED
.0 ... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+0.7
A "1" signal level is
recognized as of app. 15V
and the respective LED is
turned on
Pin
DI 16xDC24V
n
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
n+1
VIPA 221-1BH10
3-26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
Assignment
1
2
3
not connected
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.1
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
10
Input I+0.7
Input I+1.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
17
18
Input I+1.6
Input I+1.7
Ground
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input module
2
.
.
.
LED
~
~
Optocoupler
10
24V DC
V-Bus
DC 24V
11
Mintern
.
.
.
~
~
17
18
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1BH10
16
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
3ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
40mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
2Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-27
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1BH20 - DI 16xDC24V/1C
Order data
DI 16xDC24V/1C
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. It has
16 channels that indicate the respective status by means of LEDs.
Additionally, the first two channels may head for counters.
Properties
• 16 inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
• 2 inputs of this configurable as one counter, frequency or period
measurement
• Pull up abbr. pull down resistors are inside, so sensors with positive and
negative logic can be connected.
• Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
• Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
Construction
VIPA 221-1BH20
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
Label for module name
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
Status indicator
connector
assignment
LED
.0 ... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+1.7
A "1" signal level is
recognized as of app. 15V
and the respective LED is
turned on
Pin
DI 16xDC24V/1C
+0
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
+1
VIPA 221-1BH20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
Assignment
1
2
3
4
L+ DC 24V or Ground*)
Input I+0.0 / Counter (A)
Input I+0.1 / Counter (B)
Input I+0.2
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
10
Input I+0.7
Input I+1.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
18
Input I+1.7
Ground
*) DC 24V or Ground to connect sensors with positive or negative logic at I+0.0 or I+0.1
3-28
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Circuit and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Input I+0.0, I+0.1 (negative logic)
1
L+, (M)
Input module
1
2
R Load
+
3
DC 24V
-
4
5
LED
6
V-Bus
.
.
.
Optocoupler
DC 24V
~
~
18
Mintern
17
Input I+0.0, I+0.1 (positive logic)
18
Input module
M
1
R Load
DC 24V
+
LED
Optocoupler
-
V-Bus
18
Mintern
Input I+0.2 … I+1.5
Input module
LED
Optocoupler
24V DC
V-Bus
Mintern
Note!
The inputs I+0.0 and I+0.1 have also internal pull up (-down) resistors,
which lead to pin 1 of the connector strip.
You can connect the sensors with negative logic output directly to the
inputs I+0.0 and I+0.1. Here you have to supply pin 1 with DC 24V.
Connect pin 1 to Ground (bridge to pin 18) when I+0.0 and I+0.1 are used
as "normal" inputs with positive logic.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
3-29
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Overview
Manual VIPA System 200V
The module is a 16Bit digital input module for System 200V combined with
a one-channel 32Bit counter.
Inputs I+0.0 and I+0.1 are used as ‘normal’ process inputs and as counter
inputs (signal A and signal B) simultaneously.
Parameter data
Counter mode
Output data DO
V-BUS
Load value byte 0
Load value byte 1
Load value byte 2
Load value byte 3
Control byte
Reference frequency
Input data DI
Counter byte 0
Counter byte 1
Counter byte 2
Counter byte 3
DI Data byte 0
32 bit
counter
A
B
I+0.0
I+0.1
I+0.1...I+0.7
I+1.0...I+1.7
DI Data byte 1
By writing output data DO to the module, you may preset a counter value
with a load value as well as a reference frequency. The activation of this
values takes place by means of the control byte.
With a read access on the input data DI you obtain the current counter
value.
The counting is started res. stopped via the control byte (software gate).
There are 5 counter functions supported. The appropriate counter function
is set by parameterization.
Counter activation
via software gate
Many applications require that the count can be started or stopped at a
defined time depending on other events. This starting and stopping of the
count process is done via a software gate function. If the gate is opened,
count pulses can reach the counter and the count is started. If the gate is
closed, count pulses can no longer reach the counter and the count is
stopped.
The software gate is controlled via the bits START and STOP in the
Control Byte. Setting the bit START will open the software gate whereas
setting the bit STOP will close the software gate.
Count range /
Limit values
The counter module can count up and down. The count value is 32Bit wide
and is to be interpreted as of type unsigned integer. Therefore the count
limits are given as:
Lower count limit
0
3-30
Upper count limit
+ 4.294.967.295 (232 – 1)
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Load value
It is possible to specify a load value for the counter. After loading the
counter starts counting up res. down from this new value to the upper res.
lower limit value. After receiving a new counting pulse, the counter jumps to
the lower (counting up) res. upper limit (counting down) and starts the
counting again.
In the operation mode "Frequency Measurement" the load value is used to
define the time window of the measurement.
The load mechanism is controlled via the bit LOAD in the control byte.
Continuous
counting
In all counter modes, a continuous counter function is used as described in
the following paragraphs and as shown in figure.
If the counter reaches the upper count limit when counting up and a further
count pulse is received, the counter jumps to the lower count limit and
starts to add the count pulses again, meaning it counts continuously.
If the counter reaches the lower count limit when counting down and a
further count pulse is received, the counter jumps to the upper count limit
and continues to count down from there.
The count range in all modes is 0 to +4.294.967.295 and cannot be
changed. The counter starts to count at 0 when a complete restart (PowerOn Reset or VBUS-Reset) is executed on the module or the counter is
cleared by setting bit CLEAR in the control byte.
Counter value
Upper count
limit
Load value
0
Time
Maximum
counter frequency
At the designation of maximum counter frequency, two types of indication
are distinguished:
• Maximum impulse frequency
The maximum impulse frequency is the maximum frequency the
adjacent signal may have, i.e. the maximum frequency at witch the
impulses arrive at the module. At this module the maximum impulse
frequency is 100Hz.
• Maximum counter frequency
The maximum counter frequency is the frequency at witch can be
internally counted to the maximum. At this module the maximum
impulse frequency is 400Hz.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
3-31
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
Module access
For input and output data, the module occupies each 6Byte in the address
area. For setting the counter mode there are 1Byte parameter data at
disposal.
Loading the counter res. presetting of a reference frequency is via a control
byte by typing the wanted value into the output address area and setting
the Bit 2 of the control byte to activate the counter.
You may see the counter value and the state of the inputs in the input
address area. Also during count operation you may call all input channels.
Input data
DI data bytes
Input bytes 0 to 3 are assigned to the 32Bit counter value whereas bytes 4
and 5 are assigned to the 16Bit digital inputs.
Byte
Bit 7 ... 0
0
Counter Value Byte 0
1
Counter Value Byte 1
2
Counter Value Byte 2
3
Counter Value Byte 3
4
DI Data Byte 0 (I+0.7 ... I+0.0)
5
DI Data Byte 1 (I+1.7 ... I+1.0)
Output data
DO data bytes
Byte 0 to 3 are assigned to a load value according to the selected counter
mode. Byte 4 is used as control byte for the counter. Byte 5 selects a
reference frequency for the counter modes "Frequency Measurement" and
"Period Measurement".
Byte
Bit 7 ... 0
0
Load Value Byte 0
1
Load Value Byte 1
2
Load Value Byte 2
3
Load Value Byte 3
4
Control Byte
5
Reference Frequency
Control byte
Bit
0
1
2
3
7 ... 4
Function
1 = START counter (the software gate is open)
1 = STOP counter (the software gate is closed)
1 = LOAD counter
1 = CLEAR counter
reserved
Reference
frequency
Value
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
06h
07h
others
Reference frequency
16 MHz
8 MHz
4 MHz
1 MHz
100 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
100 Hz
not allowed
3-32
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Parameter data
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
The module has 3Byte parameter data for selecting the counter mode and
configuring the digital input filters.
Byte
0
1
2
Bit 7 ... 0
Counter function
00h: Quadruple Pulse Evaluation
01h: Pulse and Direction Evaluation
02h: Clock Up / Clock Down Evaluation
03h: Frequency Measurement
04h: Period Measurement
others: not allowed
Filter (Divider 0) value: 0 ... 255
Filter (Divider 1) value: 0 ... 255
Counter function
A description of the counter functions can be found at the next page.
Filter
The counter inputs are debounced by means of digital filters which can be
adjusted via parameter Filter (Divider 0 and Divider 1).
So that an pulse can be evaluated as a counting pulse, this must be
present longer than the parameterized filter value. Shorter pulses are not
evaluated.
For calculation of the pulse time the following formula is to be used:
TPulse ≥ (Divider 0 +1)*(Divider 1 +1)*2.5µs
Example:
Divider 0 = 3, Divider 1 = 0
TPulse ≥ (3+1)*1*2.5µs = 10µs
In this way filter for a pulse time of 2.5 ... 163840µs can be parameterized.
Example (default:)
Divider 0 = 0, Divider 1 = 0
TPulse ≥ 1*1*2.5µs = 2.5µs
By default (after Reset) a filter width of 2.5µs is used.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
3-33
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
Counter
functions
Quadruple Pulse
Evaluation
(00h)
Quadruple evaluation means that the rising and falling edges of A and B
are evaluated; whether up or down count pulses are generated depends on
which channel hurries first.
In this counting mode I+0.0 and I+0.1 have the following function:
I+0.0 as channel A: If channel A hurries in front, the counter counts up.
I+0.1 as channel B: If channel B hurries in front, the counter counts down.
SW-Gate
Signal A
Signal B
Up count pulses
Down count pulses
up
Pulse and
Direction
Evaluation
(01h)
down
Every rising edge of A is evaluated. Channel B defines the counter
direction.
In this counting mode I+0.0 and I+0.1 have the following function:
I+0.0 as channel A: Clock pulse for the counter at rising edge.
I+0.1 as channel B: Defines the counter direction (0 = up, 1 = down)
SW-Gate
Signal A
Signal B
Up count pulses
Down count pulses
up
Clock Up / Clock
Down Evaluation
(02h)
down
The rising edges of channel A and B are evaluated. The counter is
incremented with every rising edge of A and decremented with every rising
edge of B.
In this counting mode I+0.0 and I+0.1 have the following function:
I+0.0 as channel A: Clock up pulse for the counter at rising edge.
I+0.1 as channel B: Clock down pulse for the counter at rising edge.
SW-Gate
Signal A
Signal B
Up count pulses
Down count pulses
up
3-34
down
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
In frequency measurement mode, the module counts the number of rising
edges of channel A received within a specified time window.
Channel B is not used in this mode.
The time window TW is specified indirectly by selecting a reference frequency with DO byte 5 and defining a load value in DO bytes 0 to 3:
Frequency
measurement
(03h)
TW =
1
∗ Load Value
Reference Frequency
By setting the Bit 2 of the control byte, the time window is transferred.
When the counter is enabled (software gate is open), the reference counter
is started with the first rising edge of channel A and is incremented with
every rising edge of the reference clock.
When the reference counter reaches the load value (time TW has expired),
the current counter value is copied to DI byte 0 to 3 and can be read.
Then the counter and the reference counter is cleared automatically and
the next frequency measurement is started with the next rising edge of
channel A. If there aren’t at least two rising edges of channel A within the
time window TW , the counter value will be read as 0 for this measurement.
Frequency measurement is started and ended by using the software gate,
that is as long as the software gate is open, the frequency of channel A is
measured.
The counter can be cleared at any time by CLEAR=’1’ in the control byte
while the load value stays valid until a new value is loaded or a Reset is
detected.
The recent frequency can be computed by using the following formula:
Frequency = Reference Frequency ∗
Counter Value
Load Value
Tw
next measurement
Signal A
SW-Gate
Counter
0
Reference Counter
0
DI Data
1
0
1
2
m
2
3
4
5
6
0
n
7
0
1
1
2
3
4
5
m
0
Example:
Reference Frequency :
Load Value (n) :
Counter Value (m) :
Frequency = 1 MHz ∗
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
1 MHz
1.000.000
10.000
10.000
= 10 kHz
1.000.000
3-35
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
With very small frequencies, it is convenient to measure the period instead
of the frequency. In the operating mode "Period Measurement", the time
between two rising edges of channel A is measured by counting the
number of rising edges of the selected reference clock occurring between
two rising edges of channel A. Channel B is not used in this mode.
Period measurement is started and ended by using the software gate, that
is: as long as the software gate is open the period of channel A is
measured continuously. The counter can be cleared at any time by
CLEAR=’1’ in the control byte. The period measurement will then start
again with the next rising edge of channel A.
The recent signal period can be computed by using the following formula:
Period
measurement
(04h)
Period =
1
∗ Counter Value
Reference Frequency
next measurement
Signal A
SW-Gate
Reference Counter
DI Data
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
n
n
0
Example:
Reference Frequency :
Counter Value (n) :
Period =
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
n
1 MHz
10.000
1
∗ 10.000 = 10 ms
1 MHz
Note!
The counter value stays valid until the next measurement is completed or
the counter is cleared.
If the next measurement is never completed (e.g. because the second
rising edge of channel A never occurs), you will always see the ‘old’
counter value and not the current value of the Reference Counter.
3-36
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Counter
Rated input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input filter counter
Max. impulse frequency
Input current
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
VIPA 221-1BH20
16
1 (2 inputs A, B)
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
3ms
100µs
100kHz
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
85mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
6 Byte
6 Byte
3 Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-37
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1BH30 - DI 16xDC 24V - ECO
Order data
DI 16xDC 24V
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. It has
16 channels that indicate the respective status by means of LEDs.
Properties
•
•
•
•
Construction
VIPA 221-1BH30
16 inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V nominal input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
Label for module description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
Status indicator
connector
assignment
LED
.0 ... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+1.7
A "1" signal level is
recognized as of app. 15V
and the respective LED is
turned on
Pin
DI 16xDC24V
n
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
n+1
VIPA 221-1BH30
3-38
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Assignment
1
2
3
Not connected
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.1
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
10
Input I+0.7
Input I+1.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
18
Input I+1.7
Ground
X 2
3 4
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input module
2
.
.
.
LED
~
~
Optocoupler
10
24V DC
V-Bus
DC 24V
11
Mintern
.
.
.
~
~
17
18
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 221-1BH30
16
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
3ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
45mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
2Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-39
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-1BH50 - DI 16xDC 24V NPN mit UB4x
Order data
DI 16xDC 24V NPN
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. The
input becomes active when it is connected to ground.
This module requires a UB4x-converter. It has 16 channels that indicate
the respective status via LEDs on the UB4x. The module has to be
connected to the converter module (DEA-UB4x) by means of a flattened
round cable (DEA-KB91C).
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
Construction
VIPA 221-1BH50
16 inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
Active low input (signal level ”1” when input is at ground)
DC 24V nominal input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of a LED located on the
conversion module UB4x
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
2
3
[4]
Label for module description
Clip
Recessed connector for the
interface to a conversion
module UB4x via the
flattened round cable
Clip
4
Status indicator on UB4x
LED
Description
0... .15
L+ L-
3-40
LEDs (yellow)
I+0.0 to I+0.7 High
I+0.0 to I+0.7 Low
A "1" signal level is
recognized as of app.
15V and the respective
LED is turned on
LED (green)
Supply voltage available
Pin assignment module
Connector
Assignment
Pin
26
25
23...26
22
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
14
4
3
2
1
Supply voltage
+DC 24V
Input I+0.0
Input I+0.7
Input I+1.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
1...6
Input I+1.7
Supply voltage Ground
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Interface to UB4x
DI 16x
Schematic diagram module
Input module
UB4x
LL+
LED
DEA-KB89 or
DEA-KB91
+24V
M
.00
Optocoupler
0
DC 24V
L+
V-Bus
25
Minternal
.7
.7
High Low
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
M24
VIPA 221-1BH50
16
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
15 ... 28.8V
0 ... 5V
3ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
40mA
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the UB4x
2Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
3-41
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
221-2BL10 - DI 32xDC 24V
Order data
DI 32xDC 24V
VIPA 221-2BL10
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system It has
32 channels that indicate the respective status by means of LEDs.
Properties
•
•
•
•
32 inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V nominal input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
[3]
Construction
1
2
Label for module description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
3
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0 ... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
I+0.0 to I+3.7
A "1" signal level is
recognized as of
app. 15V and the
respective LED is
turned on
Pin
n
SM 221
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
n+1
VIPA 221-2BL10
3-42
DI 32xDC24V
n+2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
1
2 ... 17
Assignment
Not connected
Input I+0.0...I+1.7
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
19
Ground
Not connected
.
.
.
.
.
.
20 ... 35
36
Input I+2.0...I+3.7
Ground
n+3
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
Wiring diagram
1
2
.
.
.
~
~
.
.
10
28
11
DC
24V 29
.
.
.
~
~
.
.
~
~
24V DC
V-Bus
Mintern
35
M
36
M
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Power supply
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
LED
Optocoupler
DC
24V
.
~
~
17
18
Input module
20
.
Technical data
Schematic diagram
19
VIPA 221-2BL10
32
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
3ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
40mA
in 2 groups of 16 inputs each
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
4Byte
50.8x76x88
50g
3-43
Chapter 3 Digital input modules
3-44
Manual VIPA System 200V
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Chapter 4
Digital output modules
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the construction and the operation of
the VIPA digital output modules.
Below follows a description of:
• A system overview of the digital output modules
• Properties
• Construction
• Interfacing and schematic diagrams
• Technical data
Content
Topic
Page
Chapter 4
Digital output modules ................................................... 4-1
System overview .................................................................................. 4-2
222-1BF00 - DO 8xDC 24V 1A ............................................................ 4-4
222-1BF10 - DO 8xDC 24V 2A ............................................................ 4-6
222-1BF20 - DO 8xDC 24V 2A separated 4 á 2................................... 4-8
222-1BF30 - DO 8xDC 24V 0.5A - ECO............................................. 4-10
222-1BH00 - DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A with UB4x .................................... 4-12
222-1BH10 - DO 16xDC 24V 1A ........................................................ 4-14
222-1BH20 - DO 16xDC 24V 2A ........................................................ 4-16
222-1BH30 - DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A - ECO .......................................... 4-18
222-1BH50 - DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A NPN............................................. 4-20
222-2BL10 - DO 32xDC 24V 1A......................................................... 4-22
222-1HF00 - DO 8xRelay COM.......................................................... 4-24
222-1HD10 - DO 4xRelay................................................................... 4-26
222-1HD20 - DO 4xRelay bistable ..................................................... 4-28
222-1FF00 - DO 8xSolid State COM .................................................. 4-30
222-1FD10 - DO 4xSolid State........................................................... 4-32
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
4-1
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
System overview
Output modules
SM 222
Here follows a summary of the digital output modules that are currently
available from VIPA:
DC 24V output modules
SM 222
DO 8xDC24V 2A
L+
1
L+
1
.0
2
.0
2
.1
3
.1
3
.2
4
.2
4
.3
5
.3
5
.4
6
.4
6
.5
7
.5
7
.6
8
8
.6
.7
9
.7
9
F
I0
F
I0
X 2
3 4
1L
.0
.1
F1
2L
.2
.3
F2
3L
.4
.5
F3
4L
.6
.7
F4
X 2
3 4
VIPA 222-1BF00
VIPA 222-1BF10
X 2
3 4
SM 222
DO 16xDC24V
X1
X 2
3 4
VIPA 222-1BH50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
n+1
VIPA 222-1BH10
SM 222
n
X 2
3 4
+0
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
VIPA 222-1BH00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DO 16xDC24V 2A
n
X1
Order data
DC 24V
output modules
VIPA 222-1BF20
DO 16xDC24V 1A
SM 222
DO 16xDC24V
4-2
DO 8xDC24V 2A
SM 222
DO 8xDC24V 1A
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
n+1
VIPA 222-2BL10
+1
X 2
3 4
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
VIPA 222-1BH20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
SM 222
DO 8xDC24V 0,5A
L+
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
F
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 222-1BF30
DO 16xDC24V 0,5A
n
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
n+1
VIPA 222-1BH30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
DO 32xDC24V 1A
n+2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
n+3
Type
DO 8xDC 24V 1A
DO 8xDC 24V 2A
DO 8xDC 24V 2A floating 4 á 2
DO 8xDC 24V 0.5A - ECO
DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A with UB4x
DO 16xDC 24V 1A
DO 16xDC 24V 2A
DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A - ECO
DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A NPN
DO 32xDC 24V 1A
Order number
VIPA 222-1BF00
VIPA 222-1BF10
VIPA 222-1BF20
VIPA 222-1BF30
VIPA 222-1BH00
VIPA 222-1BH10
VIPA 222-1BH20
VIPA 222-1BH30
VIPA 222-1BH50
VIPA 222-2BL10
Page
4-4
4-6
4-8
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
4-20
4-22
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Relay output
modules
SM 222
SM 222
DO 8xRELAIS
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
DO 4xRELAIS bi.
1
.0
1
.0
2
3
.1
4
5
.2
6
7
.3
2
3
.1
4
5
.2
6
7
.3
8
8
9
9
9
I0
I0
I0
VIPA 222-1HF00
VIPA 222-1HD10
VIPA 222-1HD20
X 2
3 4
Order data
relay output
modules
SM 222
DO 4xRELAIS
X 2
3 4
Type
DO 8xRelay COM
DO 4xRelay
DO 4xRelay bistable
X 2
3 4
Order number
VIPA 222-1HF00
VIPA 222-1HD10
VIPA 222-1HD20
Page
4-24
4-26
4-28
Solid-state output
modules
SM 222
SM 222
DO 8xSolid State
DO 4xSolid State
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
3
.1
4
5
.2
6
7
8
.7
9
9
I0
I0
VIPA 222-1FF00
VIPA 222-1FD10
Type
DO 8xSolid State COM
DO 4xSolid State
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
2
.6
X 3
4 5
Order data
solid-state output
modules
1
.0
.3
8
X 2
3 4
Order number
VIPA 222-1FF00
VIPA 222-1FD10
Page
4-30
4-32
4-3
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1BF00 - DO 8xDC 24V 1A
Order data
DO 8xDC 24V 1A
VIPA 222-1BF00
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The
module requires a supply of DC 24V via the front-facing connector. It
provides 8 channels and the status of each channel is displayed by means
of an LED.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
8 outputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V supply voltage
1A output current
Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
LEDs for supply voltage and error message
Active channel indication by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
[3]
[4]
2
3
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
L+
.0... .7
F
Description
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage available
LEDs (green)
Q+0.0 to Q+0.7
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
LED (red)
Overload, overheat or short
circuit error
SM 222
DO 8xDC24V 1A
L+
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
F
I0
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DC 24V supply voltage
Output Q+0.0
Output Q+0.1
Output Q+0.2
Output Q+0.3
Output Q+0.4
Output Q+0.5
Output Q+0.6
Output Q+0.7
Supply ground
X 2
3 4
VIPA 222-1BF00
4-4
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
1
Schematic diagram
L+
Output module
2
3
Optocoupler
4
DC 24V
5
V-Bus
LED
DC 24V
6
7
Minternal
8
9
10
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Output current per channel
Total current
Voltage supply
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1BF00
8
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
10mA
70mA
1A protected against sustained
short circuits
8A
DC 5V via backplane bus
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1 Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
4-5
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1BF10 - DO 8xDC 24V 2A
Order data
DO 8xDC 24V 2A
VIPA 222-1BF10
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The
module requires a DC 24V supply via the connector located on the front. It
provides 8 channels and the status of each channel is displayed by means
of an LED. The maximum load current per output is 2A.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
8 outputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V supply voltage
Output current 2A
Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
LEDs for supply voltage and error message
Active channel indication by means of an LED
Construction
1
2
3
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DC 24V supply voltage
Output Q+0.0
Output Q+0.1
Output Q+0.2
Output Q+0.3
Output Q+0.4
Output Q+0.5
Output Q+0.6
Output Q+0.7
Supply ground
SM 222
DO 8xDC24V 2A
L+
.0... .7
F
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage available
LEDs (green)
Q+0.0 to Q+0.7
when an output becomes
active the respective LED is
turned on
LED (red)
Overload, overheat, short
circuit error
L+
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
F
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 222-1BF10
4-6
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
1
Schematic diagram
L+
Output module
2
3
Optocoupler
4
DC 24V
5
V-Bus
LED
DC 24V
6
Minternal
7
8
9
10
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Output current per channel
Total current
Voltage supply
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1BF10
8
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
10mA
70mA
2A protected against sustained
short circuits
10A
DC 5V via backplane bus
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
4-7
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1BF20 - DO 8xDC 24V 2A separated 4 á 2
Order data
DO 8xDC 24V 2A
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The
module requires a DC 24V supply via the connector located on the front. It
provides 8 channels and the status of each channel is displayed by means
of an LED. The maximum load current per output is 2A.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Construction
VIPA 222-1BF20
8 outputs, isolated from the backplane bus
Potential separation in 4 groups á 2 outputs
DC 24V supply voltage
Output current 2A
Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
LEDs for supply voltage and error message
Active channel indication by means of an LED
1
[1]
[2]
[3]
Label for module description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
1L...4L LED (yellow)
Supply voltage available
LEDs (green)
.0... .7 Q+0.0 to Q+0.7 (green)
when an output becomes
active the respective LED is
turned on
F1...F4 LED (red)
Overload, overheat, short
circuit error
Pin
DO 8xDC24V 2A
1L
.0
.1
F1
2L
.2
.3
F2
3L
.4
.5
F3
4L
.6
.7
F4
VIPA 222-1BF20
4-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
...
14
15
16
17
18
Assignment
not used
Supply voltage 1L+
Output Q+0.0
Output Q+0.1
Ground 1M
Supply voltage 2L+
Output Q+0.2
Output Q+0.3
Ground 2M
...
Supply voltage 4L+
Output Q+0.6
Output Q+0.7
Ground 4M
not used
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
2
L+
Output module
3
DC 24V
4.
.
5.
M
6
L+
Optocoupler
DC 24V
V-Bus
7
LED
DC 24V
8.
.
9.
M
10
L+
Minternal
11
DC 24V
.
12
.
13
.
M
14
L+
15
.
16
.
17
.
DC 24V
M
18
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Output current per channel
Voltage supply
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1BF20
8
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
10mA
70mA
2A protected against sustained
short circuits
DC 5V via backplane bus
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
4-9
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1BF30 - DO 8xDC 24V 0.5A - ECO
Order data
DO 8xDC 24V 0.5A
VIPA 222-1BF30
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The
module requires a supply of DC 24V via the front-facing connector. It
provides 8 channels and the status of each channel is displayed by means
of an LED.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
8 outputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V supply voltage
0.5A output current
Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
LEDs for supply voltage and error message
Active channel indication by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
[3]
[4]
2
3
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DC 24V supply voltage
Output Q+0.0
Output Q+0.1
Output Q+0.2
Output Q+0.3
Output Q+0.4
Output Q+0.5
Output Q+0.6
Output Q+0.7
Supply ground
SM 222
DO 8xDC24V 0,5A
L+
.0... .7
F
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage available
LEDs (green)
Q+0.0 to Q+0.7
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
LED (red)
Overload, overheat or short
circuit error
L+
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
F
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 222-1BF30
4-10
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
1
Schematic diagram
L+
Output module
2
3
Optocoupler
4
DC 24V
5
V-Bus
LED
DC 24V
6
7
Minternal
8
9
10
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Output current per channel
Total current
Voltage supply
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1BF30
8
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
10mA
70mA
0.5A protected against sustained
short circuits
4A
DC 5V via backplane bus
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
1 Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
4-11
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1BH00 - DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A with UB4x
Order data
DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The
module requires 24V via the connector on the front. It has 16 channels and
the status of each channel is displayed by means of an LED. This module
requires a converter (DEA-UB4x). The module must be connected to the
converter module by means of a flattened round cable (DEA-KB91C).
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
Construction
VIPA 222-1BH00
16 outputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V supply voltage
Output current 0.5A
Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
LEDs for supply voltage and error message
Active channel indication by means of a LED located on converter
module UB4x
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
2
Label for module description
Clip
Recessed connector for the
interface to a conversion
module UB4x via the
flattened round cable
Clip
3
[4]
4
Status indicator on UB4x
LED
Description
Pin assignment module
Connector
Pin Assignment
26
0... .15
L+ L-
23...26 DC 24V supply voltage
22
Output Q+0.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
14
4
2
4-12
25
LEDs (yellow)
Q+0.0 to Q+0.7 High
Q+1.0 to Q+1.7 Low
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
LED (green)
Supply voltage available
3
1
Output Q+0.7
Output Q+1.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
1...6
Output Q+1.7
Supply ground
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Interfacing of UB4x
Schematic diagram
DO 16x
Output module
UB4x
LL+
LED
0
Optocoupler
+24V
DC 24V
0
DEA-KB89,
DEA-KB91
V-Bus
LED
25
Minternal
.7
.7
M24
High Low
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Output current per channel
Voltage supply
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1BH00
16
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
10mA
120mA
0.5A protected against sustained
short circuits
DC 5V via backplane bus
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the UB4x
2Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
4-13
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1BH10 - DO 16xDC 24V 1A
Order data
DO 16xDC 24V 1A
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The
module requires 24V via the connector on the front. It has 16 channels and
the status of each channel is displayed by means of an LED.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
Construction
VIPA 222-1BH10
16 outputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V supply voltage
1A output current rating
Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
LEDs for supply voltage and error message
Active channel indication by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
Label for module description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
L+
.0 ... .7
F
Description
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage available
LEDs (green)
Q+0.0 to Q+1.7
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
LED (red)
Overload, overheat or
short circuit error
Pin
DO 16xDC24V 1A
n
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
n+1
VIPA 222-1BH10
4-14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
Assignment
1
2
3
DC 24V supply voltage
Output Q+0.0
Output Q+0.1
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
10
Output Q+0.7
Output Q+1.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
17
18
Output Q+1.6
Output Q+1.7
Supply ground
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
1
Schematic diagram
L+
Output module
2
.
~
~
.
.
Optocoupler
DC 24V
10
V-Bus
LED
DC 24V
11
Minternal
.
~
~
.
.
17
18
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Output current per channel
Total current
Voltage supply
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1BH10
16
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
10mA
120mA
1A protected against sustained
short circuits
10A
DC 5V via backplane bus
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
2Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
4-15
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1BH20 - DO 16xDC 24V 2A
Order data
DO 16xDC 24V 2A
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The
module requires 24V via the connector on the front. It has 16 channels and
the status of each channel is displayed by means of an LED.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
Construction
VIPA 222-1BH20
16 outputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V supply voltage
2A output current rating
Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
LEDs for supply voltage and error message
Active channel indication by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
Label for module description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
DO 16xDC24V 2A
+0
L+
.0 ... .7
F
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage available
LEDs (green)
Q+0.0 to Q+1.7
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
LED (red)
Overload, overheat or
short circuit error
+1
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
VIPA 222-1BH20
4-16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
DC 24V supply voltage
Output Q+0.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
10
Output Q+0.7
Output Q+1.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
18
Output Q+1.7
Supply ground
X 2
3 4
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
1
Schematic diagram
L+
Output module
2
.
~
~
.
.
Optocoupler
DC 24V
10
DC 24V
11
.
~
~
.
.
V-Bus
LED
Minternal
17
18
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Output current per channel
max. total current
Voltage supply
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1BH20
16
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
10mA
120mA
2A protected against sustained
short circuits
10A
DC 5V via backplane bus
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
2Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
4-17
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1BH30 - DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A - ECO
Order data
DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The
module requires 24V via the connector on the front. It has 16 channels and
the status of each channel is displayed by means of an LED.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
Construction
VIPA 222-1BH30
16 outputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V supply voltage
0.5A output current rating
Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
LEDs for supply voltage and error message
Active channel indication by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
Label for module description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Pin
Description
Assignment
DO 16xDC24V
n
L+
.0 ... .7
F
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage available
LEDs (green)
Q+0.0 to Q+1.7
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
LED (red)
Overload, overheat or
short circuit error
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
n+1
VIPA 222-1BH30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
DC 24V supply voltage
Output Q+0.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
10
Output Q+0.7
Output Q+1.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
18
Output Q+1.7
Supply ground
X 2
3 4
Note
The module can only be used together with a bus coupler! The operation at a CPU
is not possible.
4-18
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
1
Schematic diagram
L+
Output module
2
.
~
~
.
.
Optocoupler
DC 24V
10
V-Bus
LED
DC 24V
11
Minternal
.
~
~
.
.
17
18
Technical data
M
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Output current per channel
Total current
Voltage supply
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1BH30
16
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
10mA
120mA
0.5A protected against sustained
short circuits
8A
DC 5V via backplane bus
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
2Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
4-19
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1BH50 - DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A NPN
Order data
DO 16xDC 24V 0.5A NPN
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and controls the connected loads at the process level via Misfit
outputs. It provides 16 channels that operate as Low-Side switches and
that are interconnected via the load voltage. Low-Side switches are suitable
for the control of grounds. When a short circuit occurs between the
switched line and ground the result is that the load is activated until the
short circuit has been removed. Short circuits do not place an additional
load on the supply voltage.
Properties
• 16 Low-Side outputs
• Output current per channel 0.5A
• Suitable for small motors, lamps, magnetic valves and contactors
Construction
VIPA 222-1BH50
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
2
[4]
Label for module description
Clip
Recessed connector for the
interface to a outputconnection
Clip
3
4
Pin assignment
Connector
26
Pin
25
23...26
22
21
4-20
Assignment
4
3
2
1
DC 24V supply voltage
Output Q+0.0
Output Q+0.1
.
.
.
.
.
.
8
7
1...6
Output Q+1.6
Output Q+1.7
Supply ground
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
23...26
Schematic diagram
L+
22
Output module
+24V
21
20
Optocoupler
.
~
~
.
.
DC 24V
DC
24V
V-Bus
9
M
8
Minternal
7
1...6
M
Attention!
This module is not deployable with UB4x from VIPA without technical
intervention. For deploying the module with a converter module from VIPA,
please call the VIPA Hotline.
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
max. Output current per channel
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Voltage supply
Isolation
Switching rate
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1BH50
16 via Low-Side
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0.5A
120mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
20kHz max.
2Byte
25.4x76x88
80g
4-21
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-2BL10 - DO 32xDC 24V 1A
Order data
DO 32xDC 24V 1A
VIPA 222-2BL10
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The
module requires 24V via the connector on the front. It provides 32 channels
and the status of each channel is displayed by means of LEDs.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
32 outputs, isolated from the backplane bus
DC 24V supply voltage
Output current per channel 1A
Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
LEDs for supply voltage and error message
Active channel indication by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
[3]
Construction
1
2
Label for module description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
3
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
SM 222
n
L+
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage
available
.0 ... .7 LEDs (green)
Q+0.1 to Q+3.7
when an output is
active the respective
LED is turned on
F
LED (red)
Overload, overheat or
short circuit error
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
n+1
VIPA 222-2BL10
4-22
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
...
17
18
19
20
...
34
35
36
DC 24V supply voltage
Output Q+0.0
Output Q+0..1
...
Output Q+1.7
Supply ground
DC 24V supply voltage
Output Q+2.0
...
Output Q+3.6
Output Q+3.7
Supply ground
DO 32xDC24V 1A
n+2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
n+3
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
1
Schematic diagram
19
L+
2
L+
20
.
Output module
.
~
~
.
.
~
~
.
.
Optocoupler
DC 24V
10
28
11
.
DC
24V 29
24V
.
~
~
.
.
17
18
Technical data
DC
LED
Minternal
~
~
.
.
35
M
36
M
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Current consumption
via backplane bus
max. Output current per channel
max. Contact load
Voltage supply
Isolation
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
V-Bus
VIPA 222-2BL10
32 (at groups to 16)
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
15mA
180mA
1A protected against sustained
short circuits
10A
DC 5V via backplane bus
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
per group
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
via LEDs located on the front
4Byte
50.8x76x88
50g
4-23
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1HF00 - DO 8xRelay COM
Order data
DO 8xRelay COM
VIPA 222-1HF00
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and controls the connected loads at the process level via relay
outputs. The module derives power from the backplane bus. The load
voltage must be connected to terminal 1. When the total current exceeds
8A you have to balance the load current between terminals 1 and 10. The
module has 8 channels and the status of each channel is displayed by
means of an LED.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
8 relay outputs
Power supply via backplane bus
External load voltage AC 230V / DC 30V
Output current per channel 5A (AC 230V / DC 30V)
Suitable for motors, lamps, magnetic valves and DC contactors
Active channel indication by means of LED
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
[3]
[4]
2
3
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
Q+0.0 to Q+0.7
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
SM 222
DO 8xRELAIS
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
I0
X 2
3 4
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Supply voltage L
Relay output Q+0.0
Relay output Q+0.1
Relay output Q+0.2
Relay output Q+0.3
Relay output Q+0.4
Relay output Q+0.5
Relay output Q+0.6
Relay output Q+0.7
Supply voltage L
VIPA 222-1HF00
4-24
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
L
1
Relay output module
2
+5V
3
4
AC 230V
or
DC 30V
5
6
7
....
V-Bus
AC 230V
or
DC 30V
LED
Minternal
8
9
10
L
Note: When using inductive load please take
an suitable protector
(see installation guidelines).
Maximum load
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Current consumption via backp. bus
Total current
max. output current per channel
Voltage supply
Isolation
Switching rate
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Service life
VIPA 222-1HF00
8 via relay
max. AC 230V or DC 30V
300mA
with 1 L: max. 8A
with 2 L: max. 16A
AC 230V: 5A / DC 30V: 5A
DC 5V via backplane bus
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
max. 100Hz
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
25.4x76x88
80g
4-25
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1HD10 - DO 4xRelay
Order data
DO 4xRelay
VIPA 222-1HD10
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and controls the connected loads at the process level via relay
outputs. The module derives power from the backplane bus. The module
has 4 isolated channels that operate as switches and the status of each
channel is displayed by means of a LED. Power required by active loads
must be supplied externally.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
4 galvanically isolated relay outputs
Power supply via backplane bus
External load voltage AC 230V / DC 30V (may be mixed)
Max. output current per channel 5A (AC 230V / DC 30V )
Suitable for motors, lamps, magnetic valves and DC contactors
Active channel indication by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
[3]
[4]
2
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
1
2+3
4+5
6+7
8+9
10
not connected
Relay output Q+0.0
Relay output Q+0.1
Relay output Q+0.2
Relay output Q+0.3
not connected
SM 222
DO 4xRELAIS
.0... .3
LEDs (green)
Q+0.0 to Q+0.3
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
1
.0
2
3
.1
4
5
.2
6
7
.3
8
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 222-1HD10
4-26
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Wiring diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Schematic diagram
1
Relay output module
2
+5V
3
4
....
V-Bus
5
AC 230V
or
DC 30V
LED
6
7
Minternal
8
Note: When using inductive load please take
an suitable protector
(see installation guidelines).
9
10
Maximum load
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
max. Output current
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Voltage supply
Isolation
Switching rate
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Service life
VIPA 222-1HD10
4 via relay
AC 230V or max. DC 30V
AC 230V: 5A / DC 30V: 5A
160mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
max. 100Hz
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte (Bit 0 ... Bit 3)
25.4x76x88
80g
4-27
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1HD20 - DO 4xRelay bistable
Order data
DO 4xRelay bistable
VIPA 222-1HD20
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and controls the connected loads at the process level via
bistable relay outputs. The module derives power from the backplane bus.
The module has 4 channels that operate as switches. The status of the
respective switch is retained if the power from the controlling system fails.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
4 galvanically isolated relay outputs
Power supply via backplane bus
External load voltage AC 230V / DC 30V (may be mixed)
Max. Output current per channel 16A (AC 230V / DC 30V)
Suitable for motors, lamps, magnetic valves and DC contactors
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
[3]
[4]
2
3
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LEDs (not used)
Edge connector
4
Output byte /
Pin assignment
Bit
Description
Pin
Assignment
1
2+3
4+5
6+7
8+9
10
not connected
Relay output Q+0.0
Relay output Q+0.1
Relay output Q+0.2
Relay output Q+0.3
not connected
SM 222
DO 4xRELAIS bi.
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
set Q+0.0
set Q+0.1
set Q+0.2
set Q+0.3
reset Q+0.0
reset Q+0.1
reset Q+0.2
reset Q+0.3
1
.0
2
3
.1
4
5
.2
6
7
.3
8
9
I0
Setting the Bits 0...3 activates the
concerning channel.
Setting Bits 4..7 causes a reset of the
concerning channel after min. 50ms.
4-28
X 2
3 4
VIPA 222-1HD20
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Relay output module
2
+5V
3
4
....
AC 230V
or
DC 30V
V-Bus
5
6
Minternal
7
8
Note: When using inductive load please take
an suitable protector
(see installation guidelines).
9
10
Signaling diagram
Bit set O.0
Bit reset O.0
closed
Relais
open
50 ms
50 ms
50 ms
50 ms
50 ms
50 ms
50 ms
50 ms
Note!
Please remember that a relay output that has been set may only be reset
after at least 50ms when the set-signal has been removed.
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
max. Output current per channel
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Voltage supply
Isolation
Switching rate
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1HD20
4 via relay
AC 230V or DC 30V
AC 230V: 16A / DC 30V: 16A
200mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
max. 100Hz
1Byte
25.4x76x88
80g
4-29
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1FF00 - DO 8xSolid State COM
Order data
DO 8xSolid State COM
VIPA 222-1FF00
Description
The solid-state output module accepts binary control signals from the
central bus system and controls the connected loads at the process level
via solid-state relay outputs. The module derives power from the backplane
bus. The module has 8 channels that are interconnected via the load
voltage that act as switches and display the status by means of LEDs.
Solid-state relays change state when the load voltage passes through zero
(AC).
Properties
• 8 solid-state outputs with active channel indication by means of a LED
• Extended service life due to the fact that the load voltage (provided this
is AC) is switched when it passes through zero
• External load voltage AC 230V or DC 400V
• Max. output current per channel 0.5A (AC 230V / DC 400V)
• Suitable for small motors, lamps, magnetic valves and contactors
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
[3]
[4]
2
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0 ... .7
Description
LEDs (green)
Q+0.0 to Q+0.7
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
SM 222
DO 8xSolid State
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
I0
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Supply voltage
Output Q+0.0
Output Q+0.1
Output Q+0.2
Output Q+0.3
Output Q+0.4
Output Q+0.5
Output Q+0.6
Output Q+0.7
Supply voltage
X 3
4 5
VIPA 222-1FF00
4-30
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
L+
1
Solid state output module
+5V
2
AC 230V
or
DC 400V
3
4
V-Bus
LED
AC 230V
or
DC 400V
5
6
Minternal
7
Note: When using inductive load please take
an suitable protector
(see installation guidelines).
8
9
10
Technical data
L+
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
max. Output current per channel
Contact resistance
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Voltage supply
Isolation
Switching rate
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1FF00
8 via solid-state
AC 230V or DC 400V
AC 230V: 0.5A / DC 400V: 0.5A
typ. 2.1Ω , max. 3.2Ω
140mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
max. 100Hz
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte (Bit 0 ... Bit 7)
25.4x76x88
80g
4-31
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
222-1FD10 - DO 4xSolid State
Order data
DO 4xSolid State
VIPA 222-1FD10
Description
The solid-state output module accepts binary control signals from the
central bus system and controls the connected loads at the process level
via solid-state relay outputs. The module derives power from the backplane
bus. The module has 4 separate channels that operate as switches and
display the status by means of LEDs. Active loads must be supplied with
external power.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
4 galvanically isolated solid-state outputs
Power supply via backplane bus
External load voltage AC 230V or DC 400V
Max. output current per channel 0.5A (AC 230V / DC 400V )
Suitable for motors, lamps, magnetic valves and contactors
Active channel indication by means of an LED
[1]
[2]
Construction
1
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
[3]
[4]
2
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
.0... .3
Description
LEDs (green)
Q+0.0 to Q+0.3
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
SM 222
DO 4xSolid State
1
.0
2
3
.1
4
5
.2
Pin
Assignment
1
2+3
4+5
6+7
8+9
10
not connected
Output Q+0.0
Output Q+0.1
Output Q+0.2
Output Q+0.3
not connected
6
7
.3
8
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 222-1FD10
4-32
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Wiring diagram
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
Schematic diagram
1
Solid state output module
2
+5V
3
AC 230V
or
DC 400V
4
V-Bus
LED
5
6
Minternal
7
Note: When using inductive load please take
an suitable protector
(see installation guidelines).
8
9
10
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of outputs
Nominal load voltage
max. output current per channel
Current consumption
via backplane bus
Voltage supply
Isolation
Switching rate
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
VIPA 222-1FD10
4 via solid state
AC 230V or DC 400V
AC 230V: 0.5A / DC 400V: 0.5A
100mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
500Vrms (field voltage to the bus)
max. 100Hz
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte (Bit 0 ... Bit 3)
25.4x76x88
80g
4-33
Chapter 4 Digital output modules
4-34
Manual VIPA System 200V
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 5 Digital input/output modules
Chapter 5
Digital input/output modules
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the construction and the operation of
the VIPA digital input/output modules.
Below follows a description of:
• A system overview of the digital input/output modules
• Properties
• Construction
• Interfacing and schematic diagram
• Technical data
Contents
Topic
Page
Chapter 5
Digital input/output modules.......................................... 5-1
System overview .................................................................................. 5-2
Security hints for DIO modules............................................................. 5-2
223-1BF00 - DIO 8xDC 24V 1A ........................................................... 5-3
223-2BL10 - DI 16xDC 24V, DO 16xDC 24V 1A .................................. 5-5
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
5-1
Chapter 5 Digital input/output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
System overview
Input/output
modules SM 223
Here follows a summary of the digital input/output modules that are
currently available from VIPA:
SM 223
L+
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
F
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 223-1BF00
Order data
input/output
modules
16xDC24V
DI
DIO 8xDC24V 1A
Type
DIO 8xDC 24V 1A
DI 16xDC 24V, DO 16xDC 24V 1A
DO
n
n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
n+1
VIPA 223-2BL10
X 2
3 4
16xDC24V 1A
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
n+1
Order number
VIPA 223-1BF00
VIPA 223-2BL10
Page
5-3
5-5
Security hints for DIO modules
Attention!
Please regard that the voltage applied to an output channel must be ≤ the
voltage supply applied to L+.
Due to the parallel connection of in- and output channel per group, a set
output channel may be supplied via an applied input signal.
Thus, a set output remains active even at power-off of the voltage supply
with the applied input signal.
Non-observance may cause module demolition.
5-2
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 5 Digital input/output modules
223-1BF00 - DIO 8xDC 24V 1A
Order data
DIO 8xDC 24V 1A
VIPA 223-1BF00
Description
This module is a combination module. It has 8 channels that may be used
as input or as output channel. The status of the channels is displayed by
means of LEDs. Every channel is provided with a diagnostic function, i.e.
when an output is active the respective input is set to "1". When a short
circuit occurs at the load, the input is held at "0" and the error is detectable
by analyzing the input.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
8 channels, isolated from the backplane bus (as input or output)
Diagnostic function
Nominal input voltage DC 24V / supply voltage DC 24V
Output current 1A
LED error display for overload, overheat or short circuit
Active channels displayed by means of LED
[1]
Construction
Label for the module
description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
1
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
+DC 24V supply voltage
I/Q+0.0
I/Q+0.1
I/Q+0.2
I/Q+0.3
I/Q+0.4
I/Q+0.5
I/Q+0.6
I/Q+0.7
Supply ground
SM 223
DIO 8xDC24V 1A
L+
.0 ... .7
F
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage available
LEDs (green)
when the input signal is
"1" or the output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
LED (red)
Overload, overheat or
short circuit error
L+
1
.0
2
.1
3
.2
4
.3
5
.4
6
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
F
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 223-1BF00
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
5-3
Chapter 5 Digital input/output modules
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Wiring diagram
Manual VIPA System 200V
Schematic diagram
L+
1
Input output module
2
Optocoupler
3
4
5
DC 24V
6
V-Bus
Minternal
LED
DC 24V
Optocoupler
7
8
9
Minternal
10
Technical data
5-4
M
Electrical data
Number of channels
Rated load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Output current per channel
Total output current
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Voltage supply
Current consumption via backplane
bus
Data width in the process image
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
VIPA 223-1BF00
8
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
50mA
1A protected against short circuits
12A
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
3ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
65mA
1Byte PII, 1Byte PIQ
via LEDs located on the front
1Byte
1Byte
25.4x76x88
50g
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 5 Digital input/output modules
223-2BL10 - DI 16xDC 24V, DO 16xDC 24V 1A
Order data
DI 16xDC 24V, DO 16xDC 24V 1A
VIPA 223-2BL10
Description
The module has 32 channels that are isolated from the backplane bus. 16
channels operate as inputs and 16 as outputs. The status of the channels
is displayed by means of LEDs.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
32 channels, of these 16 input and 16 output channels
Nominal input voltage DC 24V
Supply voltage DC 24V(external) for outputs
Output current 1A per channel
LED error display for overload, overheat or short circuit
Active channels displayed by means of an LED
[1]
Construction
1
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
Label for the module
description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
3
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Pin
Description
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage
available
.0 ... .7 LED (green)
I+0.0 ... I+1.7
Q+0.0 ... Q+1.7
when the signal (input)
is "1" or the output is
active, the respective
LED is turned on
F
LED (red)
Overload, overheat or
short circuit error
L+
DI
n
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
n+1
VIPA 223-2BL10
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
DO 16xDC24V 1A
16xDC24V
n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
F
n+1
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Assignment
1
2
not connected
Input I+0.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
18
19
20
Input I+1.7
Ground for inputs
Supply voltage +24V
Output Q+0.0
.
.
.
.
35
36
Output Q+1.7
Supply voltage ground
outputs
5-5
Chapter 5 Digital input/output modules
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring diagram
1
Schematic diagram
19
2
Input module
L+
20
.
LED
.
.
~
~
.
10
Optocoupler
~
~
.
.
24V DC
V-Bus
28
DC
24V 29
11
.
DC
24V
Minternal
.
~
~
.
.
17
18
~
~
.
.
Output module
35
M
36
Optocoupler
M
DC 24V
V-Bus
LED
Minternal
Technical data
5-6
Electrical data
Number of channels
Rated load voltage
No-load current consumption at L+
(all A.x=off)
Output current per channel
max. contact load per connector
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input current
Voltage supply
Current consumption via backplane
bus
Data width in the process image
Status indicator
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
VIPA 223-2BL10
32
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
10mA
1A protected against short circuits
10A
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
3ms
typ. 7mA
DC 5V via backplane bus
120mA
2Byte PII, 2Byte PIQ
via LEDs located on the front
2Byte
2Byte
50.8x76x88
100g
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Chapter 6
Analog input modules
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the construction and the operation of
the VIPA analog input modules.
Below follows a description of:
• A system overview of the analog input modules
• Properties
• Constructions
• Interfacing and schematic diagram
• Technical data
Contents
Topic
Page
Chapter 6
Analog input modules..................................................... 6-1
System overview .................................................................................. 6-2
General ................................................................................................ 6-3
231-1BD30 - AI 4x12Bit ±10V - ECO.................................................... 6-6
231-1BD40 - AI 4x12Bit 4...20mA, ±20mA - ECO .............................. 6-11
231-1BD52 - AI 4x16Bit, multiinput..................................................... 6-16
231-1BD53 - AI 4x16Bit, multiinput..................................................... 6-25
231-1BD60 - AI 4x12Bit, 4 ... 20mA, isolated ..................................... 6-39
231-1BD70 - AI 4x12Bit, ±10V, isolated ............................................. 6-42
231-1BF00 - AI 8x16Bit ...................................................................... 6-45
231-1FD00 - AI 4x16Bit f .................................................................... 6-55
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-1
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
System overview
Here follows a summary of the analog input modules that are currently
available from VIPA:
Input modules
SM 231
SM 231
SM 231
SM 231
AI 4x12Bit
AI 4x12Bit
AI 4x16Bit
SF
SM 231
AI 4x16Bit
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
9
9
I0
I0
I0
VIPA 231-1BD40
VIPA 231-1BD52
VIPA 231-1BD53
I0
X 2
3 4
SF
X 2
3 4
VIPA 231-1BD30
1
F0
1
F0
2
F1
3
F1
4
F2
5
F2
6
SM 231
AI 4x12Bit 10V
F3
7
8
1
+0
2
+0
2
F1
M0
3
M0
3
F2
+1
4
+1
4
M1
5
M1
5
+2
6
+2
6
M2
7
M2
7
+3
8
+3
8
F5
M3
9
M3
9
F6
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 231-1BD60
Order data
input modules
6-2
AI 8x16Bit
F0
1
F3
F4
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 231-1BD70
6
7
F3
F7
SF
VIPA 231-1BF00
Type
AI4x12Bit ±10V - ECO,
AI4x12Bit 4...20mA, ±20mA - ECO
AI4x16Bit, Multiinput
AI4x16Bit, Multiinput
AI4x12Bit, 4 ... 20mA, isolated
AI4x12Bit, ±10V, isolated
AI8x16Bit
AI4x16Bit f
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
8
X 3
4 5
AI 8x16Bit
AI 4x12Bit
4
5
X 3
4 5
SM 231
2
3
AI 8x16Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
AI 4x16Bit f
F0
F1
F2
F3
VIPA 231-1FD00
Order number
VIPA 231-1BD30
VIPA 231-1BD40
VIPA 231-1BD52
VIPA 231-1BD53
VIPA 231-1BD60
VIPA 231-1BD70
VIPA 231-1BF00
VIPA 231-1FD00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
Page
6-6
6-11
6-16
6-25
6-39
6-42
6-45
6-55
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
General
Cabling for
analog signals
You must only use screened cable when you are connecting analog
signals. These cables reduce the effect of electrical interference. The
screen of the analog signal cable should be grounded at both ends. When
there are potential differences between the cable ends, there may flow a
current will to equalize the potential difference. This current could interfere
with the analog signals. Under these circumstances it is advisable to
ground the screen of the signal cable at one end only.
Connecting
current
sensor
Our analog input modules provide a large number of input configurations
for 2- and 4wire transducers.
Please remember that sensors require an external power supply. You have
to connect an external power supply in line with any 2wire sensor. The
following diagram explains the connection of 2- and 4wire sensors:
2wire interfacing
4wire interfacing
1
1
2
3
DC 24V
-
+
4
5
-
+
6
7
DC 24V
-
+
10
6
4 ... 20mA
+
-
+
+
-
4 ... 20mA
9
DC 24V
+
-
4 ... 20mA
DC 24V
+
transducer 4
transducer 4
DC 24V
+
transducer 3
7
8
4 ... 20mA
4 ... 20mA
-
transducer 2
5
transducer 3
DC 24V
3
4
4 ... 20mA
+
+
transducer 1
transducer 2
-
8
9
4 ... 20mA
+
-
DC 24V
2
transducer 1
-
4 ... 20mA
DC 24V
10
Note!
Please ensure that you connect the sensors with the correct polarity!
Unused inputs should be short circuited by placing a link between the
positive pole and the common ground for the channel.
Parameterization
and diagnosis
during runtime
By using the SFCs 55, 56 and 57 you may change the parameters of the
analog modules during runtime via the CPU 21x.
For diagnosis evaluation during runtime, you may use the SFCs 51 and 59.
They allow you to request detailed diagnosis information and to react to it.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-3
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Numeric notation
in S5 from
Siemens
Manual VIPA System 200V
In S5 format, the input data are stored in one word. The word consists of
the binary value and the information bits.
Please regard only the Siemens S7 format (two's complement) is
supported by the Siemens SIMATIC manager for decimal representation.
When the Siemens S5 format is used the decimal values are incorrectly
represented.
Numeric notation:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: overflow bit
0: value within measuring range
1: measuring range overrun
Bit 1: error bit (set at internal error)
Bit 2: activity bit (always 0)
Bit 7 ... 3: binary measured value
1
Bit 6 ... 0: binary measured value
Bit 7: sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V (two's complement)
Voltage
-10V
-5V
0V
5V
10V
Decimal
-16384
-8192
0
8192
16384
Hex
C000
E000
0000
2000
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
Value = 16384 ⋅
Decimal
-16384
-8192
0
8192
16384
Decimal
0
8192
16384
Hex
C000
A000
0000
2000
4000
High Byte
7
6
5
4
Low Byte
3
2
1
0
7
Decimal
-16384
-8192
0
8192
16384
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
value
sign
Numeric notation
Hex
0000
2000
4000
High Byte
7
6
5
4
Low Byte
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
value
sign
+/- 20mA (two's complement)
Current
-20mA
-10mA
0mA
10mA
20mA
10
16384
Numeric notation
4....20mA (value and sign)
Current
4mA
12mA
20mA
U = Value ⋅
U: voltage, Value: Decimal value
+/- 10V (value and sign)
Voltage
-10V
-5V
0V
5V
10V
U ,
10
Hex
C000
E000
0000
2000
4000
Formula for the calculation:
Value = 16384 ⋅
I ,
20
I = Value ⋅
20
16384
I: Current, Value: Decimal value
+/- 20mA (value and sign)
Current
-20mA
-10mA
0mA
10mA
20mA
6-4
Decimal
-16384
-8192
0
8192
16384
Hex
C000
A000
0000
2000
4000
Numeric notation
High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
Low Byte
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
value
sign
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Numeric notation
in S7 from
Siemens
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Analog values are represented as a two’s complement value.
Numeric notation:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 7 ... 0: binary measured value
1
Bit 6 ... 0: binary measured value
Bit 7: sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V
Voltage
-10V
-5V
0V
5V
10V
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
27648
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0000
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-27648
0
27648
Hex
9400
0
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-27648
0
27648
Hex
9400
0
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
27648
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
6C00
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
10
U = Value ⋅
10
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
0...10V
Voltage
0V
5V
10V
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
10
U = Value ⋅
10
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
1...5V
Voltage
1V
3V
5V
+/-4V
Voltage
-4V
0V
4V
+/-400mV
Voltage
-400mV
0V
400mV
4....20mA
Current
4mA
12mA
20mA
Value = 27648 ⋅
4
U −1 ,
U = Value ⋅
+1
27648
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
4
U = Value ⋅
4
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
400
U = Value ⋅
400
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 27648 ⋅
I −4,
16
I = Value ⋅
+4
16
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
+/- 20mA
Current
-20mA
-10mA
0mA
10mA
20mA
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Formulas for the calculation:
Value = 27648 ⋅
I ,
20
I = Value ⋅
20
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
6-5
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
231-1BD30 - AI 4x12Bit ±10V - ECO
Order data
AI 4x12Bit, ±10V
Description
The module has 4 inputs that you may configure individually. This module
requires a total of 8Byte of the process image for the input data (2Byte per
channel).
DC/DC converters provide electrical isolation for the channels of the
module with respect to the backplane bus.
Properties
• 4 inputs, channels isolated from the backplane bus
• the different channels are individually configurable and may be turned
off
• Suitable for transducers with ±10V outputs
• LED leave end overdrive region or leave end underdrive region
or wrong parameterization
VIPA 231-1BD30
[1]
Construction
1
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
3
Label for the name of the
module
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
4
Pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
pos. connection Channel 0
Channel 0 common
pos. connection Channel 1
Channel 1 common
pos. connection Channel 2
Channel 2 common
pos. connection Channel 3
Channel 3 common
SM 231
AI 4x12Bit
SF
1
LED (red)
Sum error at:
- Leave end of
overdrive region or
end of underdrive
region
- wrong
parameterization
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SF
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 231-1BD30
6-6
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input
2
3
V
2
3
Channel 0
4
5
V
6
7
V
4
D
V-Bus
µP
Mux
5
A
Channel 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
8
9
V
10
Attention!
Temporarily not used inputs have to be connected with the concerning
ground at activated channel. When deactivating unused channels by
means of FFh, this is not required.
Measurement data
acquisition
During a measurement the data is stored in the data input area.
The following figure shows the structure of the data input area:
Data input area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-7
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Parameter data
Manual VIPA System 200V
Every channel is individual parameterizeable For the parameterization,
10Byte parameterization data are available. The parameterization data are
stored permanently and remain also in off mode. By using the SFC 55
"WR_PARM" you may alter the parameterization in the module during
runtime. The time needed until the new parameterization is valid can last
up to 60ms. During this time, the measuring value output is 7FFFh.
The following table shows the structure of the parameter data:
Parameter area:
Byte Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0, 1 reserved
2
Function-no. channel 0
3
Function-no. channel 1
4
Function-no. channel 2
5
Function-no. channel 3
6..9 reserved
Function-no.
assignment
Default
00h
28h
28h
28h
28h
00h
For each channel here the function-no. of your measuring function can be
set. Please see the according table.
The function-no. 00h does not influence the function-no. stored in the
permanent parameterization data.
Assigning FFh deactivates the according channel.
No.
Function
Measurement range / representation
00h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
28h
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S7 format
±11.76V /
11.76V= max. value before over range (32511)
-10...10V= nominal range (-27648...27648)
-11.76V= min. value before under range (-32512)
two’s complement
2Bh
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S5 format
±12.50V /
12.50V = max. value before over range (20480)
-10...10V = rated range (-16384...16384)
-12.50V = min. value before under range (-20480)
value and sign
3Bh
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S5 format
±12.50V /
12.50V = max. value before over range (20480)
-10...10V = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-12.50V = min. value before under range (-20480)
two’s complement
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
Note!
The module is preset to the range "±10V voltage" in S7 format from
Siemens.
6-8
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Technical data
Module specific Data
Number of inputs
Length of cable: shielded
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Isolation
- channels / backplane bus
- between channels
Permitted potential difference
- between the inputs (UCM)
- between the inputs and
MINTERN (UISO)
Isolation tested with
Current consumption
- from the backplane bus
Dissipation power of the module
Analog value generation
Measuring principle
programmable
conversion time/resolution (per channel)
- Basic conversion time (ms)
- Resolution (Bit) incl. overrange
Noise suppression, limits of error
Noise suppression for f=n x (f1 ±1%)
(f1=interference frequency, n=1,2,...)
VIPA 231-1BD30
4
200m
yes
no
DC 2V
DC 75V / AC 60V
DC 500V
120mA
0.6W
SAR (Successive approximation)
yes
n x 2ms
13Bit
f=50Hz...400Hz
Common-mode interference
> 80dB
(UCM < 2V)
Crosstalk between the inputs
> 50dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)
Measuring range
Tolerance
Voltage input
±10V
±0.2%
Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input range)
Measuring range
Tolerance
Voltage input
±10V
±0.1%
Temperature error
±0.005%/K
(with reference to the input range)
Linearity error
±0.02%
(with reference to the input range)
Repeatability (in steady state at
25°C, with reference to the input
±0.05%
range)
Diagnostics
no
Diagnostic interrupt
none
Sum error
red SF LED
n= Number of channels
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-9
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
... continue technical data
Data for selecting a sensor
Voltage
Maximum input voltage for voltage
input (destruction limit)
Connection of the sensor
for measuring voltage
Permissible environment conditions
Operating temperature
Transport and storage temperature
relative humidity
Vibration/Shock resistance
EMC resistance
ESD/Burst
Project engineering
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostics data
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (WxHxD in mm)
Weight
6-10
Input range
±10V
Input resistance
100kΩ
max. 30V
possible
0°C...+60°C
-25°C...+70°C
95% without condensation
acc. IEC 68000-2-6/IEC 68000-2-27
acc. IEC 61000-4-2 /
IEC 61000-4-2 /
IEC 61000-4-4 (to level 3)
8Byte (1 Word per channel)
10Byte
25.4x76x88mm
ca. 80g
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
231-1BD40 - AI 4x12Bit 4...20mA, ±20mA - ECO
Order data
AI 4x12Bit, 4...20mA, ±20mA
Description
The module has 4 inputs that you may configure individually. This module
requires a total of 8Byte of the process image for the input data (2Byte per
channel).
DC/DC converters are employed to provide electrical isolation for the
channels of the module with respect to the backplane bus.
Properties
• 4 inputs, channels isolated from the backplane bus
• the different channels are individually configurable and may be turned
off
• Suitable for transducers with 4...20mA , ±20mA outputs
• LED leave end overdrive region or leave end underdrive region
or wrong parameterization
VIPA 231-1BD40
[1]
Construction
Label for the name of the
module
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
1
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
3
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
pos. connection Ch. 0
Channel 0 common
pos. connection Ch.1
Channel 1 common
pos. connection Ch.2
Channel 2 common
pos. connection Ch.3
Channel 3 common
SM 231
AI 4x12Bit
SF
LED (red)
Sum error at:
- Leave end of overdrive
region or leave
end of underdrive
region
- or wrong
parameterization
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SF
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 231-1BD40
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-11
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Wiring diagram
Manual VIPA System 200V
Schematic diagram
1
Input
2
3
A
2
Channel 0
3
4
5
A
6
7
A
4
D
V-Bus
µP
Channel 1
Mux
5
A
.
.
.
8
9
A
10
Attention!
Temporarily not used inputs have to be connected with the concerning
ground at activated channel. When deactivating unused channels by
means of FFh, this is not required.
Measurement data
acquisition
During a measurement the data is stored in the data input area:
Data input area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Parameter data
Every channel is individual parameterizeable. For the parameterization,
10Byte parameterization data are available. The parameterization data are
stored permanently and remain also in off mode. By using the SFC 55
"WR_PARM" you may alter the parameterization in the module during
runtime. The time needed until the new parameterization is valid can last
up to 60ms. During this time, the measuring value output is 7FFFh.
The following table shows the structure of the parameter data:
Parameter area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Default
0, 1
reserved
00h
2
Function-no. channel 0
2Ch
3
Function-no. channel 1
2Ch
4
Function-no. channel 2
2Ch
5
Function-no. channel 3
2Ch
6..9
reserved
00h
6-12
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Function-no.
assignment
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
For each channel here the function-no. of your measuring function can be
set. Please see the according table.
The function-no. 00h does not influence the function-no. stored in the
permanent parameterization data.
Assigning FFh deactivates the according channel.
No.
Function
Measurement range / representation
00h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
2Ch
Current ±20mA
Siemens S7 format
±23.52mA /
23.52mA = max. value before over range (32511)
-20...20mA = rated value (-27648...27648)
-23.52mA = min. value before under range (-32512)
two’s complement
2Dh
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S7 format
1.185 .. +22.81mA /
22.81mA = max. value before over range (32511)
4...20mA = rated range (0...27648)
1.185 mA = min. value before under range (-4864)
two’s complement
2Eh
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S5 format
0.8 .. +24.00mA /
24.00mA = max. value before over range (20480)
4 .. 20mA = rated range (0...16384)
0.8mA = min. value before under range (-3277)
value and sign
2Fh
Current ±20mA
Siemens S5 format
±25.00mA /
25.00mA = max. value before over range (20480)
-20...20mA = rated value (-16384...16384)
-25.00mA = min. value before under range (-20480)
value and sign
39h
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S5 format
0.8 .. +24.00mA /
24.00mA = max. value before over range (20480)
4 .. 20mA = rated range (0...16384)
0.8mA = min. value before under range (-3277)
value and sign
3Ah
Current ±20mA
Siemens S5 format
±25.00mA /
25.00mA = max. value before over range (20480)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-25.00mA = min. value before under range (-20480)
two’s complement
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
Note!
The module is preset to the range "±20mA current" in S7-format from
Siemens.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-13
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
Technical data
Module specific Data
Number of inputs
Length of cable: shielded
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Isolation
- channels / backplane bus
- between channels
Permitted potential difference
- between the inputs (UCM)
- between the inputs and
MINTERN (UISO)
Isolation tested with
Current consumption
- from the backplane bus
Dissipation power of the module
Analog value generation
Measuring principle
programmable
conversion time/resolution
(per channel)
- Basic conversion time (ms)
- Resolution (Bit) incl. overrange
Noise suppression, limits of error
Noise suppression for f=n x (f1 ±1%)
(f1=interference frequency, n=1,2,...)
VIPA 231-1BD40
4
200m
yes
no
DC 2V
DC 75V / AC 60V
DC 500V
120mA
0.6W
SAR (Successive approximation)
yes
n x 2ms
13Bit
f=50Hz...400Hz
Common-mode interference
> 80dB
(UCM < 2V)
Crosstalk between the inputs
> 50dB
Operational limit
(in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)
Measuring range
Current input
±20mA
4...20mA
Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input range)
Measuring range
Current input
±20mA
4...20mA
Temperature error
±0.005%/K
(with reference to the input range)
Linearity error
±0.02%
(with reference to the input range)
Repeatability
(in steady state at 25°C, with
±0.05%
reference to the input range)
Diagnostics
no
Diagnostic interrupt
none
Sum error
red SF LED
n= Number of channels
Tolerance
±0.2%
±0.5%
Tolerance
±0.1%
±0.2%
continued ...
6-14
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
... continue technical data
Data for selecting a sensor
Current
Maximum input current for current
input (destruction limit)
Connection of the sensor
for measuring current
as 2wire transmitter
as 4wire transmitter
Permissible environment conditions
Operating temperature
Transport and storage temperature
relative humidity
Vibration/Shock resistance
EMC resistance
ESD/Burst
Project engineering
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostics data
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (WxHxD in mm)
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Input range
±20mA
4...20mA
Input resistance
60Ω
60Ω
40mA
possible, with external supply
possible
0°C...+60°C
-25°C...+70°C
95% without condensation
acc. IEC 68000-2-6/IEC 68000-2-27
acc. IEC 61000-4-2 /
IEC 61000-4-2 /
IEC 61000-4-4 (to level 3)
8Byte (1 Word per channel)
10Byte
25.4x76x88mm
ca. 80g
6-15
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
231-1BD52 - AI 4x16Bit, multiinput
Order data
AI 4x16Bit multiinput
VIPA 231-1BD52
Description
The module has got 4 inputs that you may configure individually. The
module requires a total of 8 input data bytes in the process image (2Byte
per channel).
Isolation between the channels on the module and the backplane bus is
provided by means of DC/DC converters and optocouplers.
Properties
• the different channels are individually configurable and may be turned
off
• the common signal inputs of the channels are not isolated from each
other and the permitted potential difference is up to 5V
• LED for cable break and over current in sensor circuits
• diagnostic function
1
[1]
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
Construction
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
3
4
Status indicators
pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
SM 231
AI 4x16Bit
F0 ... F3 LED (red):
turned on when an open circuit
exists on the 4...20mA sensor
circuits
1
1
F0
2
3
F1
4
5
blinks when the current > 40mA
at all current sensor circuits
F2
6
7
F3
8
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 231-1BD52
6-16
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
For 4wire systems
channel 0
+ channel 0
Channel 0 common
+ channel 1
Channel 1 common
+ channel 2
Channel 2 common
+ channel 3
Channel 3 common
For 4wire systems
channel 2
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring diagrams
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
The following illustration shows the connection options for the different
measuring ranges. The assignment to the measuring ranges is to find in
the column "Conn." of the table "Function-no. assignment" on the next
pages.
Note!
Please note that the module 231-1BD52 was developed from the
VIPA 231-1BD50. The measuring function no longer starts at 00h but it is
offset by one to 01h.
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
U-
2
2
2
2
I
3
3
3
4
4
4
U+
5
5
5
I
6
6
6
I
7
7
7
8
8
8
U+
9
9
9
I
10
10
10
U-
V
3
A
4
V
5
A
6
V
7
A
8
V
9
10
A
Attention!
Temporarily not used inputs have to be connected with the concerning
ground at activated channel. When deactivating unused channels by
means of FFh, this is not required.
The following circumstances may cause damages at the analog module:
• The external supply of the input (current/voltage) must not be present as
long as the backplane bus of the CPU is still without current supply!
• Parameterization and connection of the input must be congruent!
• You must not apply a voltage >15V to the input!
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-17
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Function-no.
assignment
Manual VIPA System 200V
The assignment of a function-no. to a certain channel happens during
parameterization. The function-no. 00h does not influence the function-no.
stored in the permanent parameterization data.
Assigning FFh deactivates the according channel.
No.
Function
00h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
01h
Pt100 in 2wire mode
-200 .. +850°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)3)
±1°C
(3)
02h
Pt1000 in 2wire mode
-200 .. +500°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)3)
±1°C
(3)
03h
NI100 in 2wire mode
-50 .. +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)3)
±1°C
(3)
04h
NI1000 in 2wire mode
-50 .. +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)3)
±1°C
(3)
05h
Resistance measurement
60Ohm 2wire
-/
06h
Resistance measurement
600Ohm 2wire
07h
Resistance measurement
3000Ohm 2wire
08h
Measurement range / representation
60Ω= final value (32767)
-/
600Ω = final value (32767)
-/
3000Ω = final value (32767)
Tolerance
Conn.
1)2)3)
±0.2%
of final value
(3)
1)2)3)
±0.1%
of final value
(3)
1)2)3)
±0.1%
of final value
(3)
±0.1%
of final value
(3)
1)2)3)
Resistance measurement
6000Ohm 2wire
-/
09h
Pt100 via
4wire connection
-200 .. +850°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)
±0.5°C
(4)
0Ah
Pt1000 via
4wire connection
-200 .. +500°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)
±0.5°C
(4)
0Bh
NI100 via
4wire connection
-50 .. +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)
±0.5°C
(4)
0Ch
NI1000 via
4wire connection
-50 .. +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)
±0.5°C
(4)
0Dh
Resistance measurement
60Ohm 4wire
-/
1)2)
±0.1%
of final value
(4)
1)2)
±0.05%
of final value
(4)
±0.05%
of final value
(4)
0Eh
0Fh
10h
Resistance measurement
600Ohm 4wire
Resistance measurement
3000Ohm 4wire
Thermocouple type J ,
externally compensated
6000Ω = final value (32767)
60Ω= final value (32767)
-/
600Ω= final value (32767)
-/
3000Ω = final value (32767)
-210 °C .. 850 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)
1)2)4)
±1°C
(2)
continued ...
6-18
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
… continue
No.
Function
Measurement range / representation
Tolerance
11h
Thermocouple type K,
externally compensated
-270 °C .. 1200 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)4)
±1.5°C
(2)
12h
Thermocouple type N,
externally compensated
-200 °C .. 1300 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)4)
±1.5°C
(2)
13h
Thermocouple type R,
externally compensated
-50 °C .. 1760 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)4)
±4°C
(2)
14h
Thermocouple type T,
externally compensated
-270 °C .. 400 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)4)
±1.5°C
(2)
15h
Thermocouple type S,
externally compensated
-50 °C .. 1760 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)4)
±5°C
(2)
18h
Thermocouple type J,
internally compensated
-210 °C .. 850 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)5)
±1.5°C
(2)
19h
Thermocouple type K,
internally compensated
-270 °C .. 1200 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)5)
±2°C
(2)
1Ah
Thermocouple type N,
internally compensated
-200 °C .. 1300 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)5)
±2°C
(2)
1Bh
Thermocouple type R,
internally compensated
-50 °C .. 1760 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)5)
±5°C
(2)
1Ch
Thermocouple type T,
internally compensated
-270 °C .. 400 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)5)
±2°C
(2)
1Dh
Thermocouple type S,
internally compensated
-50 °C .. 1760 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1)2)4)
±5°C
(2)
27h
Voltage 0...50mV
Siemens S7 format
0...50mV /
59.25mV = max. range before over range (32767)
0...50mV = nominal value (0...27648)
two’s complement
1)
±0.1%
of final value
(1)
28h
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S7 format
±11.85V /
11.85V= max. value before over range (32767)
-10...10V= nominal range (-27648...27648)
-11.85V= min. value before under range (-32767)
two’s complement
1)
±0.05%
of final value
(1)
29h
Voltage ±4V
Siemens S7 format
±4.74V /
4.74V = max. value before over range (32767)
-4...4V = rated range (-27648...27648)
-4.74V = min. value before under range (-32767)
two’s complement
1)
±0.05%
of final value
(1)
2Ah
Voltage ±400mV
Siemens S7 format
±474mV /
474mV = max. value before over range (32767)
-400...400mV = rated range (-27648...27648)
-474mV = min. value before under range (-32767)
two’s complement
1)
±0.1%
of final value
(1)
2Bh
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S5 format
±11.85V /
12.5V = max. value before over range (20480)
-10...10V = rated range (-16384...16384)
-12.5V = min. value before under range (-20480)
value and sign
±0.2%
of final value
(1)
1)
Conn.
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-19
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
… continue
No.
Function
Measurement range / representation
Tolerance
2Ch
Current ±20mA
Siemens S7 format
2Dh
Conn.
±23.70mA /
23.70mA = max. value before over range (32767)
-20...20mA = rated value (-27648...27648)
-23.70mA = min. value before under range (-32767)
two’s complement
1)
±0.05%
of final value
(1)
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S7 format
1.185 .. +22.96mA /
22.96mA = max. value before over range (32767)
4...20mA = rated range (0...27648)
0mA = min. value before under range (-5530)
two’s complement
1)
±0.05%
of final value
(1)
2Eh
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S5 format
1.185 .. +22.96mA /
22.96mA = max. value before over range (20480)
20mA = rated range (0...16384)
0mA = min. value before under range (-4096)
value and sign
1)
±0.2%
of final value
(1)
2Fh
Current ±20mA
Siemens S5 format
±23.70mA /
23.70mA = max. value before over range (19456)
-20...20mA = rated value (-16384...16384)
-23.70mA = min. value before under range (-19456)
value and sign
1)
±0.05%
of final value
(1)
32h
Resistance measurement
6000Ohm 4wire
-/
6000Ω= final value (32767)
1)2)
±0.05%
of final value
(4)
33h
Resistance measurement
6000Ohm 4wire
-/
6000Ω= final value (6000)
1)2)
±0.05%
of final value
(4)
35h
Resistance measurement
60Ohm 2wire
-/
60Ω= final value (6000)
1)2)3)
±0.2%
of final value
(3)
36h
Resistance measurement
600Ohm 2wire
-/
600Ω = final value (6000)
1)2)3)
±0.1%
of final value
(3)
37h
Resistance measurement
3000Ohm 2wire
-/
3000Ω = final value (30000)
1)2)3)
±0.1%
of final value
(3)
38h
Resistance measurement
6000Ohm 2wire
-/
6000Ω = final value (6000)
1)2)3)
±0.1%
of final value
(3)
6
Current ±20mA
Siemens S5 format
±23.70mA /
23.70mA = max. value before over range (19456)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-23.70mA = min. value before under range (-19456)
two’s complement
1)
±0.05%
of final value
(1)
6
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S5 format
±11.85V /
12.5V = max. value before over range (20480)
-10...10V = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-12.5V = min. value before under range (-20480)
two’s complement
1)
±0.2%
of final value
(1)
3Dh
Resistance measurement
60Ohm 4wire
-/
60Ω= final value (6000)
1)2)
±0.1%
of final value
(4)
)3Ah
)3Bh
continued ...
6-20
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
… continue
No.
Function
Measurement range / representation
Tolerance
Conn.
±0.05%
of final value
(4)
3Eh
Resistance measurement
600Ohm 4wire
-/
600Ω= final value (6000)
1)2)
3Fh
Resistance measurement
3000Ohm 4wire
-/
3000Ω = final value (30000)
1)2)
±0.05%
of final value
(4)
57h
Voltage 0...50mV
0...50mV /
59.25mV = max. value before over range (5925)
0...50mV = rated range (0...5000)
two’s complement
1)
±0.1%
of final value
(1)
58h
Voltage ±10V
±11.85V /
11.85V= max. value before over range (11850)
-10...10V= rated range (-10000...10000)
-11.85V= min. value before under range (-11850)
two’s complement
1)
±0.05%
of final value
(1)
59h
Voltage ±4V
±4.74V /
4.74V = max. value before over range (4740)
-4...4V = rated range (-4000...4000)
-4.74V = min. value before under range (-4740)
two’s complement
1)
±0.05%
of final value
(1)
5Ah
Voltage ±400mV
±474mV /
474mV = max. value before over range (4740)
-400...400mV = rated range (-4000...4000)
-474mV = min. value before under range (-4740)
two’s complement
1)
±0.1%
of final value
(1)
5Ch
Current ±20mA
±23.70mA /
23.70mA = max. value before over range (23700)
-20...20mA = rated value (-20000...20000)
-23.70mA = min. value before under range (-23700)
two’s complement
1)
±0.05%
of final value
(1)
5Dh
Current 4...20mA
1.185 .. +22.96mA /
22.96mA = max. value before over range (18960)
4...20mA = rated range (0...16000)
0mA = min. value before under range (-4000)
two’s complement
±0.05%
of final value
(1)
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
1)
measured at an environmental temperature of 25°C, velocity of 15 conversions/s
2)
excluding errors caused by transducer inaccuracies
3)
excluding errors caused by contact resistance and line resistance
1)
4)
the compensation of the neutralization must be implemented externally
5)
the compensation for the neutralization is implemented internally by including the temperature of the front plug. The thermal conductors
have to be connected directly to the front plug, and where necessary these must be extended by means of Thermocouple extension
cables
6)
starting from hardware release 11
Note!
The module is preset to the range "±10V voltage" at S7 format.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-21
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Measurement data
acquisition
Manual VIPA System 200V
During a measurement the data is stored in the data input area. The table
above shows the allocation of the data to a measured value as well as the
respective tolerance.
The following figure shows the structure of the data input area:
Data input area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Note!
Only channels 0 and 2 are used in 4wire systems.
Parameter data
Every channel is individual parameterizeable. 10Byte are available for the
configuration data. Configuration parameters are stored in permanent
memory and they will be retained even if power is turned off.
The following table show the structure of the parameter area:
Parameter area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Diagnostic alarm byte:
Bit 5 ... 0: reserved
Bit 6: 0: diagnostic alarm inhibited
1: diagnostic alarm enabled
Bit 7: reserved
1
reserved
2
Function-no. channel 0 (see table)
3
Function-no. channel 1 (see table)
4
Function-no. channel 2 (see table)
5
Function-no. channel 3 (see table)
6
Option byte channel 0
7
Option byte channel 1
8
Option byte channel 2
9
Option byte channel 3
6-22
Default
00h
00h
2Dh
2Dh
2Dh
2Dh
00h
00h
00h
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Parameters
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Diagnostic alarm
The diagnostic alarm is enabled by means of Bit 6 of Byte 0. In this case
an error a 4Byte diagnostic message will be issued to the master system.
Function-no.
Here you have to enter the function number of your measurement function
for every channel. The allocation of the function number to a measurement
function is available from the table above.
Option byte
Here you may specify the conversion rate. In addition selection and
envelope functions have been implemented.
Note!
Please note that the resolution is reduced when conversion rate is increased due to the shorter integration time.
The format of the data transfer remains the same. The only difference is
that the lower set of bits (LSBs) loose significance for the analog value.
Structure of the option byte:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
6 ... 9 Option byte:
Bit 3 ... 0: rate*
0000 15 conversions/s
0001 30 conversions/s
0010 60 conversions/s
0011 123 conversions/s
0100 168 conversions/s
0101 202 conversions/s
0110 3.7 conversions/s
0111 7.5 conversions/s
Bit 5 ... 6: Selection function
00 deactivated
01 use 2 of 3 values
10 use 4 of 6 values
Bit 7 ... 6: Envelope function
00 deactivated
01 envelope ± 8
10 envelope ±16
*)
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Resolution
Default
00h
16
16
15
14
12
10
16
16
These specifications apply to 1channel operation. For multi-channel operations, the conversion rate
per channel can be calculated by dividing the specified conversion rate by the number of active
channels.
6-23
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Diagnostic data
Manual VIPA System 200V
As soon as you activated the alarm release in Byte 0 of the parameter area,
4 diagnostic Bytes with fixed content are transferred to the superordinated
system in case of an error. Please note that analog modules only use the
first two bytes for diagnostic purposes. The remaining two byte are not used.
The structure of the diagnostic bytes is as follows:
Diagnostic data:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: Module malfunction
Bit 1: constant 0
Bit 2: external error
Bit 3: channel error present
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
1
Bit 3 ... 0: class of module
0101 analog module
Bit 4: channel information available
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
2 ... 3 not assigned
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Input resistance
measuring range
- Thermocouple
- Resistance thermometer
- Resistance measuring
- Voltage measuring
- Current measuring
Power supply
Current consumption
Isolation
Status indicators
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Process alarm data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
6-24
Default
-
-
-
VIPA 231-1BD52
4 differential inputs
> 2MΩ (voltage range)
< 50Ω (current range)
Type J, K, N, R, S, T
Pt100, Pt1000, NI100, NI1000
60Ω, 600Ω, 3kΩ
0...50mV, 0...10V, ±4mV, ±4V, ±10V
4...20mA, ±20mA
5V via backplane bus
280mA via backplane bus
500Vrms
(field voltage - backplane bus)
via LEDs on the front
8Byte (1 word per channel)
10Byte
4Byte
25.4x76x88mm
100g
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
231-1BD53 - AI 4x16Bit, multiinput
Order data
AI 4x16Bit multiinput
VIPA 231-1BD53
Description
The module has 4 inputs that you may configure individually. The module
requires a total of 8 input data bytes in the periphery area (2Byte per
channel).
Isolation between the channels on the module and the backplane bus is
provided by means of DC/DC converters and optocouplers.
Properties
• the different channels are individually configurable and may be turned
off
• the common signal inputs of the channels are not isolated from each
other and the permitted potential difference is up to 5V
• diagnostic function
1
[1]
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
Construction
Label for module description
Label for the bit address with
description
LEDs
Edge connector
3
4
Status indicators
pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
SM 231
AI 4x16Bit
F0 ... F3 LED (red):
turned on as soon as an
channel error is detected res.
an entry in the diagnostic bytes
happened
1
1
F0
2
3
F1
4
5
F2
6
7
F3
8
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 231-1BD53
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
For 4wire systems
channel 0
+ channel 0
Channel 0 common
+ channel 1
Channel 1 common
+ channel 2
Channel 2 common
+ channel 3
Channel 3 common
For 4wire systems
channel 2
6-25
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Wiring diagrams
Manual VIPA System 200V
The following illustration shows the connection options for the different
measuring ranges. The assignment to the measuring ranges is to find in
the column "Conn." of the table "Function-no. assignment" on the next
pages.
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
U-
2
2
2
2
I
3
3
3
4
4
4
U+
5
5
5
I
6
6
6
I
7
7
7
8
8
8
U+
9
9
9
I
10
10
10
U-
V
3
A
4
V
5
A
6
V
7
A
8
V
9
10
A
Attention!
Temporarily not used inputs have to be connected with the concerning
ground at activated channel. When deactivating unused channels by
means of FFh, this is not required.
The following circumstances may cause damages at the analog module:
• The external supply of the input (current/voltage) must not be present as
long as the backplane bus of the CPU is still without current supply!
• Parameterization and connection of the input must be congruent!
• You must not apply a voltage >15V to the input!
6-26
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Function-no.
assignment
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
The assignment of a function-no. to a certain channel happens during
parameterization. The function-no. 00h does not influence the function-no.
stored in the permanent parameterization data.
Assigning FFh deactivates the according channel.
No.
Function
Measurement range / representation
00h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
01h
Pt100 in 2wire mode
-200°C ... +850°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(3)
02h
Pt1000 in 2wire mode
-200°C ... +850°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(3)
03h
NI100 in 2wire mode
-60°C ... +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(3)
04h
NI1000 in 2wire mode
-60°C ... +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(3)
05h
Resistance measurement
60Ohm 2wire
-/
60Ω= final value (32767)
(3)
06h
Resistance measurement
600Ohm 2wire
-/
600Ω = final value (32767)
(3)
07h
Resistance measurement
3000Ohm 2wire
-/
3000Ω = final value (32767)
(3)
08h
Resistance measurement
6000Ohm 2wire
-/
6000Ω = final value (32767)
(3)
09h
Pt100 via
4wire connection
-200°C ... +850°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(4)
0Ah
Pt1000 via
4wire connection
-200°C ... +850°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(4)
0Bh
NI100 via
4wire connection
-60°C ... +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(4)
0Ch
NI1000 via
4wire connection
-60°C ... +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(4)
0Dh
Resistance measurement
60Ohm 4wire
-/
60Ω= final value (32767)
(4)
0Eh
Resistance measurement
600Ohm 4wire
-/
600Ω= final value (32767)
(4)
0Fh
Resistance measurement
3000Ohm 4wire
-/
3000Ω = final value (32767)
(4)
10h
Thermocouple type J,
externally compensated
-210°C ... 1200 °C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(2)
1)
Conn.
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-27
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
… continue
No.
11h
12h
13h
14h
15h
16h
18h
19h
1Ah
1Bh
1Ch
1Dh
1Eh
27h
Function
Measurement range / representation
1)
Thermocouple type K,
externally compensated
1)
Thermocouple type N,
externally compensated
1)
Thermocouple type R,
externally compensated
1)
Thermocouple type T,
externally compensated
1)
Thermocouple type S,
externally compensated
1)
Thermocouple type E,
externally compensated
2)
Thermocouple type J,
internally compensated
2)
Thermocouple type K,
internally compensated
2)
Thermocouple type N,
internally compensated
2)
Thermocouple type R,
internally compensated
2)
Thermocouple type T,
internally compensated
2)
Thermocouple type S,
internally compensated
2)
Thermocouple type E,
internally compensated
Voltage ±50mV
Siemens S7 format
28h
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S7 format
29h
Voltage ±4V
Siemens S7 format
2Ah
Voltage ±400mV
Siemens S7 format
2Bh
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S5 format
Conn.
-270°C . . +1372°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-270°C . . +1300°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-50°C . . +1769°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-270°C . . +400°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-50°C . . +1769°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-270°C . . +1000°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-210°C . . +1200°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-270°C . . +1372°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-270°C . . +1300°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-50°C . . +1769°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-270°C .. +400°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-50°C .. +1769°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
-270°C .. +1000°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
±58.79mV /
58.79mV = max. value before over range (32511)
-50...50mV= nominal range (-27648...27648)
-58.79mV = min. value before under range (-32512)
two’s complement
±11.76V /
11.76V= max. value before over range (32511)
-10...10V= nominal range (-27648...27648)
-11.76V= min. value before under range (-32512)
two’s complement
±4.70V /
4.70V = max. value before over range (32511)
-4...4V = rated range (-27648...27648)
-4.70V = min. value before under range (-32512)
two’s complement
±470mV /
470mV = max. value before over range (32511)
-400...400mV = rated range (-27648...27648)
-470mV = min. value before under range (-32512)
two’s complement
±12.50V /
12.50V = max. value before over range (20480)
-10...10V = rated range (-16384...16384)
-12.50V = min. value before under range (-20480)
value and sign
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
continued ...
6-28
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
… continue
No.
Function
Measurement range / representation
2Ch
Current ±20mA
Siemens S7 format
2Dh
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S7 format
2Eh
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S5 format
2Fh
Current ±20mA
Siemens S5 format
32h
Resistance measurement
6000Ω 4wire
Resistance measurement
6000Ω 4wire
Resistance measurement
60Ω 2wire
Resistance measurement
600Ω 2wire
Resistance measurement
3000Ω 2wire
Resistance measurement
6000Ω 2wire
Current ±20mA
Siemens S5 format
±23.52mA /
23.52mA = max. value before over range (32511)
-20...20mA = rated value (-27648...27648)
-23.52mA = min. value before under range (-32512)
two’s complement
1.185 .. +22.81mA /
22.81mA = max. value before over range (32511)
4...20mA = rated range (0...27648)
1.185 mA = min. value before under range (-4864)
two’s complement
0.8 .. +24.00mA /
24.00mA = max. value before over range (20480)
4 .. 20mA = rated range (0...16384)
0.8mA = min. value before under range (-3277)
value and sign
±25.00mA /
25.00mA = max. value before over range (20480)
-20...20mA = rated value (-16384...16384)
-25.00mA = min. value before under range (-20480)
value and sign
-/
6000Ω= final value (32767)
-/
6000Ω= final value (6000)
-/
60Ω= final value (6000)
-/
600Ω = final value (6000)
-/
3000Ω = final value (30000)
-/
6000Ω = final value (6000)
±25.00mA /
25.00mA = max. value before over range (20480)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-25.00mA = min. value before under range (-20480)
two’s complement
±12.50V /
12.50V = max. value before over range (20480)
-10...10V = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-12.50V = min. value before under range (-20480)
two’s complement
-/
60Ω= final value (6000)
-/
600Ω= final value (6000)
-/
3000Ω = final value (30000)
33h
35h
36h
37h
38h
3Ah
3Bh
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S5 format
3Dh
Resistance measurement
60Ω 4wire
Resistance measurement
600Ω 4wire
Resistance measurement
3000Ω 4wire
3Eh
3Fh
Conn.
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(4)
(4)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(4)
(4)
(4)
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-29
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
… continue
No.
Function
57h
Voltage ±50mV
58h
59h
5Ah
5Ch
5Dh
62h
6Ah
FFh
1)
2)
Measurement range / representation
Conn.
±58.79mV /
58.79mV= max. value before over range (5879)
-50...50mV= rated range (-5000...5000)
-58.79V= min. value before under range (-5879)
two’s complement
±11.76V /
Voltage ±10V
11.76V= max. value before over range (11760)
-10...10V= rated range (-10000...10000)
-11.76V= min. value before under range (-11760)
two’s complement
±4.70V /
Voltage ±4V
4.70V = max. value before over range (4700)
-4...4V = rated range (-4000...4000)
-4.70V = min. value before under range (-4700)
two’s complement
±470mV /
Voltage ±400mV
470mV = max. value before over range (4700)
-400...400mV = rated range (-4000...4000)
-470mV = min. value before under range (-4700)
two’s complement
±23.51mA /
Current ±20mA
23.51mA = max. value before over range (23510)
-20...20mA = rated value (-20000...20000)
-23.51mA = min. value before under range (-23510)
two’s complement
Current 4...20mA
1.185 .. +22.81mA /
22.81mA = max. value before over range (18810)
4...20mA = rated range (0...16000)
1.185mA = min. value before under range (-2815)
two’s complement
Cu50
-50°C ... +150°C /
2wire
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
Cu50
-50°C ... +150°C /
4wire
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
Channel not active (turned off)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(3)
(4)
the compensation of the neutralization must be implemented externally
the compensation for the neutralization is implemented internally by including the temperature of the front plug. The thermal
conductors have to be connected directly to the front plug, and where necessary these must be extended by means of thermo
element extension cables
Note!
The module is preset to the range "±10V voltage" at S7 format.
6-30
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Measurement data
acquisition
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
During a measurement the data is stored in the data input area.
The following figure shows the structure of the data input area:
Data input area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Note!
Only channels 0 and 2 are used in 4wire systems.
Diagnosis at wire
break with
Thermocouples always
active
When using Thermocouples the diagnosis for wire break is always active. If
a diagnosis alarm is parameterized, the module initializes a diagnosis at
wire break for the corresponding channel.
Parameter data
Every channel is individual parameterizeable. For the parameterization,
10Byte parameterization data are available. The parameterization data are
stored permanently and remain also in off mode. By using the SFC 55
"WR_PARM" you may alter the parameterization in the module during
runtime. The time needed until the new parameterization is valid can last
up to 60ms. During this time, the measuring value output is 7FFFh.
The following table shows the structure of the parameter data:
Parameter area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Default
0
diagnostic:
00h
Bit 5 ... 0: reserved
Bit 6: diagnostic alarm
0: deactivated
1: activated
Bit 7: reserved
1
Bit 7 ... 0: reserved
00h
2
Function-no. channel 0
28h
3
Function-no. channel 1
28h
4
Function-no. channel 2
28h
5
Function-no. channel 3
28h
6
Option-Byte channel 0
00h
7
Option-Byte channel 1
00h
8
Option-Byte channel 2
00h
9
Option-Byte channel 3
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-31
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Parameters
Manual VIPA System 200V
Diagnostic alarm
With the help of Bit 6 of Byte 0, you may release the diagnostic alarm. In
case of an error, the record set 0 with a size of 4Byte is transferred to the
superordinated system.
More detailed information is to find below under "Diagnostic data".
Function-no.
Here you set the function-no. of your measuring function for every channel.
Please see the according table above.
Option-Byte
Here you may set the transducer velocity for every input channel. Please
regard that a higher transducer velocity causes a lower resolution because
of the lower integration time.
The data transfer format remains unchanged. Only the lower Bits (LSBs)
are not longer relevant for the analog value.
Structure Option-Byte:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
6 ... 7 Bit 3 ... 0: Velocity per channel*
0000 15 conversions/s
0001 30 conversions/s
0010 60 conversions/s
0011 120 conversions/s
0100 170 conversions/s
0101 200 conversions/s
0110 3,7 conversions/s
0111 7,5 conversions/s
Bit 5 ... 4: Mean value evaluation
00 deactivated
01 use 2 of 3 values
10 use 4 of 6 values
11 deactivated
Bit 7 ... 6: Envelope function
00 deactivated
01 envelope ± 8
10 envelope ±16
11 deactivated
*)
6-32
Resolution
Default
00h
16
16
15
14
12
10
16
16
These specifications apply to 1channel operation. For multi-channel operations, the conversion rate
per channel can be calculated by dividing the specified conversion rate by the number of active
channels.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Mean value evaluation
Mean value function 2 of 3 values:
After every measuring, the module evaluates the mean value of the last 3
binary values. The value most different from the mean value is deleted and
another mean value evaluated from the remaining 2 values. This value is
monitored.
Mean value function 4 of 6 values:
After every measuring, the module evaluates the mean value of the last 6
binary values. The 2 values most different from the mean value are deleted
and another mean value evaluated from the remaining 4 values. This value
is monitored.
Envelope function
The output valued is "wrapped" with an envelope. If the measured value
over- res. underruns the envelope, the envelope migrates accordingly. The
output value is the mean value of the envelope.
The following sample illustrates this:
1
Integration time
2
+8/+16
Envelope
function:
-8/-16
Measured
Value
Output value
(Mean value evaluation
of envelope function)
3
1
2
3
Measuring value within envelope → no envelope shift, Output is mean value of the current
envelope upper and lower limit.
Measuring value oversteps the envelope → Envelope shift up for the difference between
"old" envelope upper limit and measuring range, output value is the mean value of the
"new" envelope upper and lower limit.
Measuring value shortfalls the envelope → Envelope shift down for the difference between
"old" envelope lower limit and measuring range, output value is the mean value of the
"new" envelope upper and lower limit.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-33
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
Diagnostic data
The diagnostic data uses 12Byte and are stored in the record sets 0 and 1
of the system data area.
When you enable the diagnostic alarm in Byte 0 of the parameter area,
modules will transfer record set 0 to the superordinated system when an
error is detected.
Record set 0 has a predefined content and a length of 4Byte. The content
of the record set may be read in plain text via the diagnostic window of the
CPU.
For extended diagnosis during runtime, you may evaluate the 12Byte wide
record set 1 via the SFCs 51 and 59.
Evaluate
diagnosis
At present diagnosis, the CPU interrupts the user application and branches
into the OB 82. This OB gives you detailed diagnostic data via the SFCs 51
and 59 when programmed correctly.
After having processed the OB 82, the user application processing is
continued. Until leaving the OB 82, the data remain consistent.
Record set 0
Record set 0 (Byte 0 to 3):
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: Module malfunction
Bit 1: reserved
Bit 2: External error
Bit 3: Channel error present
Bit 6 ... 4: reserved
Bit 7: Wrong parameters in the module
1
Bit 3 ... 0: Module class
0101 Analog module
Bit 4: Channel information present
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
2
reserved
3
reserved
6-34
Default
00h
15h
00h
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Record set 1
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
The record set 1 contains the 4Byte of record set 0 and additional 8Byte
channel specific diagnostic data.
The diagnostic bytes have the following assignment:
Record set 1 (Byte 0 to 11):
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Default
0 ... 3 Content record set 0 (see page before)
74h
4
Bit 6 ... 0: Channel type
70h: Digital input
71h: Analog input
72h: Digital output
73h: Analog output
74h: Analog in-/output
Bit 7: reserved
5
Bit 7 ... 0: Number of diagnostic bits of the module
08h
per channel
6
Bit 7 ... 0: Number of identical channels of a
04h
module
00h
7
Bit 0: Channel error Channel 0
Bit 1: Channel error Channel 1
Bit 2: Channel error Channel 2
Bit 3: Channel error Channel 3
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
00h
8
Bit 0: Wire break Channel 0
(only at Thermocouples)
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 0
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow Channel 0
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow Channel 0
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
00h
9
Bit 0: Wire break Channel 1
(only at Thermocouples)
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 1
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow Channel 1
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow Channel 1
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
00h
10
Bit 0: Wire break Channel 2
(only at Thermocouples)
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 2
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow Channel 2
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow Channel 2
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
00h
11
Bit 0: Wire break Channel 3
(only at Thermocouples)
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 3
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow Channel 3
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow Channel 3
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-35
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
Technical data
Electrical Data
VIPA 231-1BD53
Number of inputs
- at 4wire resistance-type sensor
Length of cable (shielded)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
4
2
200m
Constant current for resistance-type
sensor
Isolation
- channel / backplane bus
- between the channels
Permitted potential difference
- between the inputs (UCM)
- between inputs and MINTERNAL
(UISO)
Isolation proofed with
Current consumption
- via backplane bus
Power dissipation of the module
Analog value generation
1.25mA
Measuring principle
parameterizable
Conversion rate (Hz)
Integration time (ms)
Basic conversion time (ms)
- Additional conversion time for
open-circuit monitoring (ms)
- Service time per cycle (only by
thermocouple) (ms)
Resolution (Bit) incl. overrange
Noise suppression for frequency f1 (Hz)
Basic execution time of the module, in
ms (all channels enabled)
Averaging
Envelope function
Suppression of interference,
Limits of error
yes
no
DC 5V
DC 75V/AC 60V
DC 500V
280mA
1.4W
Calculation time/Resolution (per channel)
Sigma-Delta
yes
200
170
5
6
7
8
135
135
120
8
10
135
60
17
19
135
30
33
35
135
15
67
69
135
7.5
133
135
135
3.7
270
272
135
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
no
28
12
14
15
16
32
40
76
140
16
16
50 and 60Hz
276
540
16
1088
2 of 3 or 4 of 6
±8 or ±16
Noise suppression for f=n x (f1 ±1%) (f1=interference frequency, n=1,2,...)
Common-mode interference
> 80dB
(UCM < 5V)
Series-mode noise (peak value of noise > 80dB
< nominal value of input range
Crosstalk between the inputs
> 50dB
continued ...
6-36
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
... continue
Operational limit (only valid to 120W/s)
(in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)
Measuring range
At voltage input
±50mV
±400mV, ±4mV, ±10V
At current input
±20mA
0...20mA
4...20mA
Resistance
0...60Ω
0...600Ω, 0...3kΩ, 0...6kΩ
Resistance thermometer
Pt100, Pt1000
Ni100, Ni1000
Cu50
Thermocouple
Type J, K, N, R, S, E, T
Basic error limit (only valid to 120W/s)
(during temperature is 25°C, referring to input range)
Measuring range
Voltage input
±50mV
±400mV, ±4V, ±10V
Current input
±20mA
0...20mA
4...20mA
Resistance
0...60Ω
0...600Ω, 0...3kΩ, 0...6kΩ
Resistance thermometer
Pt100, Pt1000
Ni100, Ni1000
Cu50
Thermocouple
Type J, K, N, R, S, E, T
Temperature error
(with reference to the input range)
measuring current
Linearity error
(with reference to the input range)
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C
referred to the input range)
Temperature error of internal
compensation
States, Interrupts, Diagnosis
Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnosis functions
- Sum error monitor
- Diagnostic information read-out
Tolerance
±0.6%
±0.3%
±0.3%
±0.6%
±0.8%
±0.8%
±0.4%
±0.4%
±1.0%
±1.4%
±1.5%
Tolerance
±0.4%
±0.2%
±0.2%
±0.4%
±0.5%
±0.4%
±0.2%
±0.2%
±0.5%
±0.7%
±1.0%
±0.005%/K
±0.015%/K
±0.02%
±0.05%
±1.5%
parameterizable
red SF LED (per channel)
possible
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-37
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
... continue
Data for selecting a sensor
Voltage
±50mV, ±400mV, ±4V, ±10V
Current
±20mA, 0...20mA, 4...20mA
Resistors
0...60Ω, 0...600Ω, 0...3kΩ, 0...6kΩ
Resistance thermometer
Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, Cu50
Thermocouple
Type J, K, N, R, S, E, T
Maximum input voltage for voltage input
(destruction limit)
Maximum input current for current input
(destruction limit)
Connection of the sensor
For measuring voltage
For measuring current
as 2wire transmitter
as 4wire transmitter
For measuring resistance
with 2conductor connection
with 4conductor connection
Characteristic linearization
parameterizable
for RTD
Thermocouple
Temperature compensation
parameterizable
internal temperature compensation
external temperature compensation
with comparison point (0°C)
Unit for temperature measurement
Parameter data
20MΩ
50Ω
20MΩ
20MΩ
20MΩ
25V
30mA
possible
possible with external power supply
possible
possible
possible
yes
Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, Cu50
Typ J, K, N, R, S, E, T
yes
possible
possible
°C
Input data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
8Byte (1 Word per channel)
10Byte
12Byte
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
25.4x76x88mm
80g
6-38
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
231-1BD60 - AI 4x12Bit, 4 ... 20mA, isolated
Order data
AI 4x12Bit, 4...20mA, isolated
VIPA 231-1BD60
Description
The module has 4 inputs that are permanently configured to measure
current signals (4 ... 20mA). This module requires a total of 8Byte of the
process image for the input data (2Byte per channel).
The measured values are returned in S5 format from Siemens. DC/DC
converters and isolation amplifiers are employed to provide electrical
isolation for the channels of the module with respect to the backplane bus
and between the different channels.
Properties
• 4 inputs, channels isolated from the backplane bus and from each other
(galvanic isolation of the channels by means of isolation amplifiers)
• Permanently configured for current measurements
• No parameterization required
• Suitable for transducers with 4 ... 20mA outputs
• LEDs to indicate wire break
[1]
Construction
1
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
3
Label for the name of the
module
Label for the bit address with
description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
pos. connection Ch. 0
Channel 0 common
pos. connection Ch.1
Channel 1 common
pos. connection Ch.2
Channel 2 common
pos. connection Ch.3
Channel 3 common
SM 231
AI 4x12Bit
+0 ... +3 LED (red)
wire break detection
These LEDs is turned on
when the transducer is
disconnected.
1
+0
2
M0
3
+1
4
M1
5
+2
6
M2
7
+3
8
M3
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 231-1BD60
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-39
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Wiring diagram
Manual VIPA System 200V
Schematic diagram
1
Input
2
A
3
+0
Channel 0
M0
4
A
5
6
A
7
+1
D
V-Bus
µP
Channel 1
Mux
M0
A
.
.
.
8
A
9
10
Wire break
recognition
The wire break recognition is always active. In case of a wire break res.
when no encoder is connected, the LED of the according channel is turned
on. The module has no diagnostic ability.
Numeric notation
Input data in Siemens S5 format is stored in a word. The word contains the
binary value and information bits:
Numeric notation:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: overflow bit
0: value within measuring range
1: measuring range exceeded
Bit 1: error bit (set at internal error)
Bit 2: activity bit (always 0)
Bit 7 ... 3: binary measured value (see table below)
1
Bit 6 ... 0: binary measured value (see table below)
Bit 7: sign
0 positive
1 negative
The following table shows the allocation of binary values to the respective
measured values.
6-40
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Numeric notation
in Siemens
S5 format
Technical data
Measured
value in
mA
24.0
20.016
20.0
19.98
12.0
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.016
4.008
4
3.984
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Units
Binary measured
value
T E Ü Range
2560
2049
2048
2047
1024
512
256
128
2
1
0
-2
-128
-256
-384
-512
0101000000000
0100000000001
0100000000000
0011111111111
0010000000000
0001000000000
0000100000000
0000010000000
0000000000010
0000000000001
0000000000000
1111111111110
1111110000000
1111100000000
1111010000000
1111000000000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Current measuring range
Input filter time delay
Input resistance
Power supply
Current consumption
Isolation
Status indicators
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Process alarm data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 overdrive region
0
0 nominal range
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 Underdrive region
0
0
0
0
VIPA 231-1BD60
4 individually isolated
4 ... 20mA
3ms
20Ω
5V via backplane bus
280mA via backplane bus
yes, every channel separately,
isolation tested at 500Vrms
via LEDs on the front
8Byte (1 word per channel)
25.4x76x88mm
120g
6-41
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
231-1BD70 - AI 4x12Bit, ±10V, isolated
Order data
AI 4x12Bit, ±10V, isolated
Description
The module has 4 inputs that are permanently configured to measure
voltage signals (±10V). This module requires a total of 8Byte of the process
image for the input data (2Byte per channel).
The measured values are returned in S5 format from Siemens. DC/DC
converters and isolation amplifiers are employed to provide electrical
isolation for the channels of the module with respect to the backplane bus
and between the different channels.
Properties
• 4 inputs, channels isolated from the backplane bus and from each other
(Galvanic isolation of the channels by means of isolation amplifiers)
• Permanently configured for voltage measurements
• No parameterization required
• Suitable for transducers with ±10V outputs
VIPA 231-1BD70
[1]
Construction
1
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
3
Label for the name of the
module
Label for the bit address with
description
Edge connector
4
Pin assignment
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
pos. connection Channel 0
Channel 0 common
pos. connection Channel 1
Channel 1 common
pos. connection Channel 2
Channel 2 common
pos. connection Channel 3
Channel 3 common
SM 231
AI 4x12Bit 10V
1
+0
2
M0
3
+1
4
M1
5
+2
6
M2
7
+3
8
M3
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 231-1BD70
6-42
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1
Input
2
82kΩ
V
3
1,6kΩ
4
V
5
6
V
7
D
V-Bus
µP
Mux
A
+0
Channel 0
M0
82kΩ
+1
1,6kΩ
M0
Channel 1
.
.
.
8
V
9
10
Numeric notation
Input data in Siemens S5 format is stored in a word. The word contains the
binary value and information bits:
Numeric notation:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: overflow bit
0: value within measuring range
1: measuring range exceeded
Bit 1: error bit (set at internal error)
Bit 2: activity bit (always 0)
Bit 7 ... 3: binary measured value (see table below)
1
Bit 6 ... 0: binary measured value (see table below)
Bit 7: sign
0 positive
1 negative
The following table shows the allocation of binary values to the respective
measured values.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-43
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
Numeric notation
in Siemens
S5 format
Measured Units
value in V
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Voltage measuring range
Input filter time delay
Input resistance
Power supply
Current consumption
Isolation
12.5
10.005
10.0
5
2.5
1.25
0.625
0.005
0
-0.005
-0.625
-1.25
-2.5
-5
-10.0
-10.005
-12
2560
2049
2048
1024
512
256
128
1
0
-1
-128
-256
-512
-1024
-2048
-2049
-2560
Binary measured
value
0101000000000
0100000000001
0100000000000
0010000000000
0001000000000
0000100000000
0000010000000
0000000000001
0000000000000
1111111111111
1111110000000
1111100000000
1111000000000
1110000000000
1100000000000
1011111111111
1011000000000
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Process alarm data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
6-44
T E Ü Range
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 overdrive region
0
0 nominal range
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 Underdrive region
0
VIPA 231-1BD70
4 individually isolated
±10V
3ms
83.5kΩ
5V via backplane bus
280mA via backplane bus
yes, every channel separately,
isolation tested at 500Vrms
8Byte (1 word per channel)
25.4x76x88mm
120g
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
231-1BF00 - AI 8x16Bit
Order data
AI 8x16Bit
Description
The analog input module transfers analog signals from the process into
digital signals for the internal processing.
As transducer you may connect thermo couplers type J, K, T and
resistance thermometer Pt100.
The modules has 8 inputs that you may configure in groups of two
channels individually.
Properties
• 8 analog inputs
• wire break detection
• resolution 15Bit + sign
Construction
1
VIPA 231-1BF00
[1]
[2]
[3]
Label for the name of the
module
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-45
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
F0...F7 LED (red):
error for each channel
AI 8x16Bit
F0
SF
LED (red):
sum error
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
SF
VIPA 231-1BF00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
not connected
pos. connection Ch.0
Channel 0 common
pos. connection Ch.1
Channel 1 common
pos. connection Ch.2
Channel 2 common
pos. connection Ch.3
Channel 3 common
pos. connection Ch.4
Channel 4 common
pos. connection Ch.5
Channel 5 common
pos. connection Ch.6
Channel 6 common
pos. connection Ch.7
Channel 7 common
not connected
Note!
Unused inputs on activated channels have to be connected to the respective ground. This is not necessary when the unused channels are turned off
by means of FFh.
6-46
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Connection
diagram
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-47
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Function-no.
assignment
The assignment of a function-no. to a certain channel happens during
parameterization. The function-no. 00h does not influence the function-no.
stored in the permanent parameterization data. Assigning FFh deactivates
the according channel.
No.
Function
00h
01h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
RTD Pt100
-200 .. +850°C /
in 2wire mode
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
RTD Pt100
-328 .. 1562°F
in 2wire mode
in units of 1/10°F, two’s complement
RTD Pt100
-200 .. +850°C /
via 4wire connection
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
RTD Pt100
-328 .. 1562°F
via 4wire connection
in units of 1/10°F, two’s complement
Thermocouple type J,
0 °C .. 1000°C /
externally compensated in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
Thermocouple type J,
32 .. 1832°F
externally compensated in units of 1/10°F, two’s complement
Thermocouple type K,
0 °C .. 1300°C /
externally compensated in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
Thermocouple type K,
32 .. 2372°F
externally compensated in units of 1/10°F, two’s complement
Thermocouple type T,
-200 °C .. +400°C /
externally compensated in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
Thermocouple type T,
-328 .. 752°F
externally compensated in units of 1/10°F, two’s complement
Thermocouple type J,
0 °C .. 1000°C /
internally compensated
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
Thermocouple type J,
32 .. 1832°F
internally compensated
in units of 1/10°F, two’s complement
Thermocouple type K,
0 °C .. 1300°C /
internally compensated
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
Thermocouple type K,
32 .. 2372°F
internally compensated
in units of 1/10°F, two’s complement
Thermocouple type T,
-200 °C .. +400°C /
internally compensated
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
Thermocouple type T,
-328 .. 752°F
internally compensated
in units of 1/10°F, two’s complement
Voltage 0...60mV
0...60mV = nominal range (0-27648)
Voltage 0...60mV
0...60mV = nominal range (0-6000)
in units of 1/100mV
61h
09h
69h
10h
40h
11h
41h
14h
44h
18h
48h
19h
49h
1Ch
4Ch
26h
56h
FFh
Manual VIPA System 200V
Measurement range / representation
Tolerance ref. to
nominal range
Conn.
1)2)3)
±0.15%
(3)
1)2)3)
±0.15%
(3)
1)2)
±0.15%
(4)
1)2)
±0.15%
(4)
1)2)4)
±0.1%
(2)
1)2)4)
±0.1%
(2)
±0.1%
(2)
±0.1%
(2)
1)2)4)
1)2)4)
-200..-60.1 ±0.5%
-60...400 ±0.2%
1)2)4)
-328...-76,1 ±0.5%
-76...752 ±0.2%
1)2)5)
±1.0%
1)2)4)
(2)
(2)
(2)
1)2)5)
±1.0%
(2)
1)2)5)
±1.0%
(2)
1)2)5)
±1.0%
(2)
1)2)5)
±2.0%
(2)
1)2)5)
±2.0%
(2)
1)
1)
±0.1%
±0.1%
(1)
(1)
Channel not active (off)
1)
measured at an ambient temperature of 25°C, velocity of 15 conversions/s
2)
excluding errors caused by transducer inaccuracies
3)
excluding errors caused by contact resistance and line resistance
4)
the compensation of the neutralization has to be implemented externally
5)
the compensation for the neutralization is implemented internally by including the temperature of the front plug. The thermal
conductors have to be connected directly to the front plug, and where necessary these have to be extended by means of
Thermocouple extension cables.
6-48
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Measurement data
acquisition
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
During a measurement, the data is stored in the data input area. The table
above shows the allocation of the data to a measured value as well as the
respective tolerance.
The following figures show the structure of the data input area:
Data input area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
8
High-Byte channel 4
9
Low-Byte channel 4
10
High-Byte channel 5
11
Low-Byte channel 5
12
High-Byte channel 6
13
Low-Byte channel 6
14
High-Byte channel 7
15
Low-Byte channel 7
Note!
Only channels 0, 2, 4 and 6 are used in 4wire systems.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-49
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Parameter data
Manual VIPA System 200V
You may configure the channels in groups of two individually. 10Byte are
available for the configuration data. Configuration parameters are stored in
permanent memory and they will be retained even if power is turned off.
The following table show the structure of the parameter area:
Parameter area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Diagnostic alarm byte:
Bit 0: 0: wire break recognition channel 0/1 off
1: wire break recognition channel 0/1 on
Bit 1: 0: wire break recognition channel 2/3 off
1: wire break recognition channel 2/3 on
Bit 2: 0: wire break recognition channel 4/5 off
1: wire break recognition channel 4/5 on
Bit 3: 0: wire break recognition channel 6/7 off
1: wire break recognition channel 6/7 on
Bit 4, 5: reserved
Bit 6: 0: diagnostic alarm inhibited
1: diagnostic alarm enabled
Bit 7: reserved
1
reserved
2
Function-no. channel 0/1 (see table)
3
Function-no. channel 2/3 (see table)
4
Function-no. channel 4/5 (see table)
5
Function-no. channel 6/7 (see table)
6
Option Byte channel 0/1
7
Option Byte channel 2/3
8
Option Byte channel 4/5
9
Option Byte channel 6/7
6-50
Default
0Fh
00h
26h
26h
26h
26h
00h
00h
00h
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Parameters
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Diagnostic alarm
The diagnostic alarm is enabled by means of Bit 6 of Byte 0. In this case
an error a 4Byte diagnostic message will be issued to the master system.
Function-no.
Here you have to enter the function number of your measurement function
for 2 channels. The allocation of the function number to a measurement
function is available from the table above.
Option-Byte
Here you may specify for 2 channels the conversion rate.
Note!
Please note that the resolution is reduced when conversion rate is
increased due to the shorter integration time.
The format of the data transfer remains the same. The only difference is
that the lower set of bits (LSBs) loose significance for the analog value.
Structure of the option byte:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
6 ... 9 Option byte:
Bit 3 ... 0: rate*
0000 15 conversions/s
0001 30.1 conversions/s
0010 60 conversions/s
0011 123.2 conversions/s
0100 168.9 conversions/s
0101 202.3 conversions/s
0110 3.76 conversions/s
0111 7.51 conversions/s
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
*)
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Resolution
Default
00h
16
16
15
14
12
10
16
16
These specifications apply to 1channel operation. For multi-channel operations the conversion rate
per channel can be calculated by dividing the specified conversion rate by the number of active
channels.
6-51
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
Diagnostic data
The diagnostic data have a size of 12Byte and are stored in the record sets
0 and 1 of the system data area.
As soon as you activated the alarm release in Byte 0 of the parameter
area, in case of an error record set 0 is transferred to the superordinated
system.
Record set 0 has a fixed content and a length of 4Byte. The contents of
record set 0 may be monitored in plain text via the diagnosis window of the
CPU.
For extended diagnostic purposes during runtime, you may evaluate the
record set 1 with a size of 12Byte via the SFCs 51 and 59.
Evaluate
diagnosis
At a diagnostic task the CPU interrupts the user application and branches
into OB 82. With according programming, you may request in this OB with
the SFCs 51 and 59 detailed diagnostic information and react on it.
After execution of the OB 82, the processing of the user application is
continued. The diagnostic data remains consistent until leaving the OB 82.
Record set 0
Byte 0 to 3:
Record set 0 (Byte 0 to 3):
Byte Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: error in module
Bit 1: reserved
Bit 2: external error
Bit 3: channel error
Bit 6 ... 4: reserved
Bit 7: wrong parameter in module
1
Bit 3 ... 0: module class
0101 analog module
Bit 4: channel information present
Bit 7 ... 6: reserved
2
not used
3
Bit 5 ... 0: reserved
Bit 6: missing (lost) process alarm (see process alarm)
Bit 7: reserved
6-52
Default
00h
15h
00h
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Record set 1
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Byte 0 to 11:
Record set 1 contains the 4Byte of record set 0 and 8Byte module specific
diagnostic data.
The diagnostic bytes have the following assignment:
Record set 1 (Byte 0 to 11):
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0 ... 3 content of record set 0 (see page above)
4
Bit 6 ... 0: channel type
70h: digital input
71h: analog input
72h: digital output
73h: analog output
Bit 7: reserved
5
Bit 7 ... 0: number of diagnostic output bits per
channel
6
Bit 7 ... 0: number of similar channels of a module
7
Bit 0: Channel error channel 0
Bit 1: Channel error channel 1
Bit 2: Channel error channel 2
Bit 3: Channel error channel 3
Bit 4: Channel error channel 4
Bit 5: Channel error channel 5
Bit 6: Channel error channel 6
Bit 7: Channel error channel 7
8
Bit 0: Wire break channel 0
Bit 1: Parameterization error channel 0
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow channel 0
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow channel 0
Bit 4: Wire break channel 1
Bit 5: Parameterization error channel 1
Bit 6: Measuring range underflow channel 1
Bit 7: Measuring range overflow channel 1
9
Bit 0: Wire break channel 2
Bit 1: Parameterization error channel 2
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow channel 2
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow channel 2
Bit 4: Wire break channel 3
Bit 5: Parameterization error channel 3
Bit 6: Measuring range underflow channel 3
Bit 7: Measuring range overflow channel 3
Default
71h
04h
08h
00h
00h
00h
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-53
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
... continue
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
10
Bit 0: Wire break channel 4
Bit 1: Parameterization error channel 4
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow channel 4
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow channel 4
Bit 4: Wire break channel 5
Bit 5: Parameterization error channel 5
Bit 6: Measuring range underflow channel 5
Bit 7: Measuring range overflow channel 5
11
Bit 0: Wire break channel 6
Bit 1: Parameterization error channel 6
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow channel 6
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow channel 6
Bit 4: Wire break channel 7
Bit 5: Parameterization error channel 7
Bit 6: Measuring range underflow channel 7
Bit 7: Measuring range overflow channel 7
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Input resistance
measuring range
- Thermocouple
- Resistance thermometer
- Voltage measuring
Power supply
Current consumption
Isolation
Dissipation power
Status indicators
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Process alarm data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
6-54
Default
00h
00h
VIPA 231-1BF00
8
> 2MΩ
Type J, K, T
Pt100
0...60mV
5V via backplane bus
280mA via backplane bus
500Vrms
(field voltage - backplane bus)
typ. 1.3W
via LEDs on the front
16Byte (1 word per channel)
10Byte
12Byte
25.4x76x88mm
120g
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
231-1FD00 - AI 4x16Bit f
Order data
AI 4x16Bit f
Description
The module has 4 fast (f=fast) inputs that you may configure individually.
The module requires a total of 8 input data bytes in the process image
(2Byte per channel).
Isolation between the channels on the module and the backplane bus is
provided by means of DC/DC converters and optocouplers.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
Construction
1
VIPA 231-1FD00
Using all 4 channels, the cycle time is < 1ms
the different channels are individually configurable and can be turned off
LED for signaling wire break in current loop operation
Diagnostic function
Resolution 16Bit
[1]
[2]
[3]
Label for the name of the
module
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-55
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
Description
Wiring diagram
AI 4x16Bit f
F0 ... F3 LED (red):
is on if the measured current
value exceeds the range
4...20mA (cable break or
overload).
F0
F1
F2
F3
VIPA 231-1FD00
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
1
L+ (In)
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
L+ (In)
+2,5V
4
5
L+ (Out)
6
6
+2,5V
7
7
L+ (Out)
8
9
8
9
L+ (Out)
10
10
+2,5V
11
11
12
12
13
L+ (Out)
13
L+ (Out)
14
14
+2,5V
15
15
L+ (Out)
16
16
17
L+ (Out)
17
18
GND
18
L+ (Out)
GND
The internal resistance Ri of the 2.5V voltage source is 100Ω. For a
connection of a voltage divider the following equivalent circuit is valid:
100 Ω
...
2,5V
=
Rx
Um
...
Note!
Unused inputs on activated channels have to be connected to the respective ground. This is not necessary when the unused channels are turned off
by means of FFh.
6-56
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Function-no.
allocation
No.
00h
28h
29h
2Ah
2Ch
2Dh
58h
59h
5Ah
5Ch
5Dh
FFh
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
The assignment of a function-no. to a certain channel happens during
parameterization. The function-no. 00h does not influence the function-no.
stored in the permanent parameterization data.
Assigning FFh deactivates the according channel.
Function
Measurement range / representation
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
1)
-10V ... -9.9V (-27648 ... -27371)
Voltage ±10V
-9.9 ... 9.9 (-27370 ... 27370)
Siemens S7 format
-10...10V= rated range (-27648...27648)
(Default)
1)
9.9 ... 10V (27371 ... 27648)
Voltage ±4V
±4.70V /
Siemens S7 format
4.70V = max. value before over range (32511)
-4...4V = rated range (-27648...27648)
-4.70V = min. value before under range (-32512)
two’s complement
Voltage ±400mV
±470mV /
Siemens S7 format
470mV = max. value before over range (32511)
-400...400mV = rated range(-27648...27648)
-470mV = min. value before under range (-32512)
two’s complement
Current ±20mA
±23.51mA /
Siemens S7 format
23.51mA = max. value before over range (32511)
-20...20mA = rated range (-27648...27648)
-23.51mA = min. value before under range (-32512)
two’s complement
Current 4...20mA
1.185 .. +22.81mA /
Siemens S7 format
22.81mA = max. value before over range (32511)
4...20mA = rated range (0...27648)
1.18mA = min. value before under range (-4864)
two’s complement
1)
-10 ... -9.9V (-10000 ... -9901)
Voltage ±10V
-9,9 ... 9.9V (-9900 ... 9900)
-10...10V= rated range(-10000...10000)
1)
9.9 ... 10V (9901 ... 10000)
±4.95V /
Voltage ±4V
4,95V = max. value before over range (4950)
-4...4V = rated range (-4000...4000)
-4.95V = min. value before under range (-4950)
two’s complement
±495mV /
Voltage ±400mV
495mV = max. value before over range (4950)
-400...400mV = rated range (-4000...4000)
-495mV = min. value before under range (-4950)
two’s complement
±25mA /
Current ±20mA
25mA = max. value before over range (25000)
-20...20mA = rated range (-20000...20000)
-25mA = min. value before under range(-25000)
two’s complement
0.8 .. +24.00mA /
Current 4...20mA
24.00mA = End over range (20000)
4...20mA = rated range (0...16000)
0.8mA = min. value before under range (-3200)
two’s complement
Channel not active (turned off)
Tolerance
Conn.
0.2% of
final value
(1), (2)
0.2% of
final value
(1), (2)
0.4% of
final value
(1)
0.2% of
final value
(1)
0.5% of
final value
(1)
0.2% of
final value
(1), (2)
0.2% of
final value
(1), (2)
0.4% of
final value
(1)
0.2% of
final value
(1)
0.5% of
final value
(1)
1) depends on calibration factor and is not guaranteed.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-57
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
Note!
The module is preset to the range "±10V voltage" in S7 format from
Siemens.
Numeric notation
in S7 from
Siemens
Analog values are represented as a two’s complement value.
Numeric notation:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 7 ... 0: binary measured value
1
Bit 6 ... 0: binary measured value
Bit 7: sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V
Voltage
-10V
-5V
0V
5V
10V
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
6C00
Decimal
-27648
0
27648
Hex
9400
0
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-27648
0
27648
Hex
9400
0
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
27648
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
6C00
+/-4V
Voltage
-4V
0V
4V
+/-400mV
Voltage
-400mV
0V
400mV
4....20mA
Current
4mA
12mA
20mA
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
27648
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
10
U = Value ⋅
10
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
4
U = Value ⋅
4
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
400
U = Value ⋅
400
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 27648 ⋅
I −4,
16
I = Value ⋅
+4
16
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
+/- 20mA
Current
-20mA
-10mA
0mA
10mA
20mA
6-58
Formulas for the calculation:
Value = 27648 ⋅
I ,
20
I = Value ⋅
20
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Measurement data
acquisition
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
During a measurement the data is stored in the data input area. The table
above shows the allocation of the data to a measured value as well as the
respective tolerance.
The following figures show the structure of the data input area:
Data input area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Parameter data
You may configure every channel individually. 32Byte are available for the
configuration data. Configuration parameters are stored in permanent
memory and they will be retained even if power is turned off.
The following table show the structure of the parameter area:
Parameter area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Diagnostic alarm byte:
Bit 5 ... 0: reserved
Bit 6: 0: diagnostic alarm inhibited
1: diagnostic alarm enabled
Bit 7: reserved
1
Limit value monitoring:
Bit 0: limit value monitoring channel 0
Bit 1: limit value monitoring channel 1
Bit 2: limit value monitoring channel 2
Bit 3: limit value monitoring channel 3
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
2
Function-no. channel 0 (see table)
3
Function-no. channel 1 (see table)
4
Function-no. channel 2 (see table)
5
Function-no. channel 3 (see table)
6-9
reserved
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Default
00h
00h
28h
28h
28h
28h
00h
continued ...
6-59
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
... continue
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
10
Bit 2 ... 0: mean value
000: disabled
001: mean value over 2 values
010: mean value over 4 values
011: mean value over 8 values
100: mean value over 16 values
101, 011, 111: disabled
Bit 7 ... 3: reserved
11-15 reserved
16
channel 0, upper limit, High-Byte
17
channel 0, upper limit, Low-Byte
18
channel 0, lower limit, High-Byte
19
channel 0, lower limit, Low-Byte
20
channel 1, upper limit, High-Byte
21
channel 1, upper limit, Low-Byte
22
channel 1, lower limit, High-Byte
23
channel 1, lower limit, Low-Byte
24
channel 2, upper limit, High-Byte
25
channel 2, upper limit, Low-Byte
26
channel 2, lower limit, High-Byte
27
channel 2, lower limit, Low-Byte
28
channel 3, upper limit, High-Byte
29
channel 3, upper limit, Low-Byte
30
channel 3, lower limit, High-Byte
31
channel 3, lower limit, Low-Byte
6-60
Manual VIPA System 200V
Default
00h
00h
7Fh
FFh
80h
00h
7Fh
FFh
80h
00h
7Fh
FFh
80h
00h
7Fh
FFh
80h
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Diagnostic data
The diagnostic data have a size of 12Byte and are stored in the record sets
0 and 1 of the system data area.
As soon as you activated the alarm release in Byte 0 of the parameter
area, in case of an error record set 0 is transferred to the superordinated
system.
Record set 0 has a fixed content and a length of 4Byte. The contents of
record set 0 may be monitored in plain text via the diagnosis window of the
CPU.
For extended diagnostic purposes during runtime, you may evaluate the
record set 1 with a size of 12Byte via the SFCs 51 and 59.
Evaluate
diagnosis
At a diagnostic task the CPU interrupts the user application and branches
into OB 82. With according programming, you may request in this OB with
the SFCs 51 and 59 detailed diagnostic information and react on it.
After execution of the OB 82, the processing of the user application is
continued. The diagnostic data remains consistent until leaving the OB 82.
Record set 0
Byte 0 to 3:
Record set 0 (Byte 0 to 3):
Byte Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: error in module
Bit 1: reserved
Bit 2: external error
Bit 3: channel error
Bit 6 ... 4: reserved
Bit 7: wrong parameter in module
1
Bit 3 ... 0: module class
0101 analog module
Bit 4: channel information present
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
2
not used
3
Bit 5 ... 0: reserved
Bit 6: missing (lost) process alarm (see process alarm)
Bit 7: reserved
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Default
00h
15h
00h
00h
6-61
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Record set 1
Manual VIPA System 200V
Byte 0 to 11:
Record set 1 contains the 4Byte of record set 0 and 8Byte module specific
diagnostic data.
The diagnostic bytes have the following assignment:
Record set 1 (Byte 0 to 11):
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0 ... 3 content of record set 0 (see page above)
4
Bit 6 ... 0: channel type
70h: digital input
71h: analog input
72h: digital output
73h: analog output
Bit 7: reserved
5
Bit 7 ... 0: number of diagnostic output bits
per channel
6
Bit 7 ... 0: number of similar channels of a module
7
Bit 0: channel error channel 0
Bit 1: channel error channel 1
Bit 2: channel error channel 2
Bit 3: channel error channel 3
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
8
Bit 0: reserved
Bit 1: parameterization error channel 0
Bit 4 ... 2: reserved
Bit 5: parameterization error channel 1
Bit 6, 7: reserved
9
Bit 0: reserved
Bit 1: parameterization error channel 2
Bit 4 ... 2: reserved
Bit 5: parameterization error channel 3
Bit 6, 7: reserved
10 ... 11 reserved
6-62
Default
71h
04h
04h
00h
00h
00h
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Process alarm
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
The upper and the lower limit value is parameterizable for every channel.
Please regard during parameterization that you have to enable the limit
value monitoring in parameter byte 1.
If the signal is beyond the defined operation range, a process alarm is
initialized. In the CPU, the process alarm block (OB 40) is called.
The 4Byte of process alarm additional information are used as follows:
Process alarm additional information
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: upper limit exceeded channel 0
Bit 1: upper limit exceeded channel 1
Bit 2: upper limit exceeded channel 2
Bit 3: upper limit exceeded channel 3
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
1
Bit 0: lower limit underrun channel 0
Bit 1: lower limit underrun channel 1
Bit 2: lower limit underrun channel 2
Bit 3: lower limit underrun channel 3
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
2
reserved
3
reserved
Default
00h
00h
00h
00h
Note!
When a process alarm has not yet been acknowledged by the CPU and a
new process alarm of the same type occurs at this channel, a diagnostic
alarm is initialized, containing the information "Process alarm missing/lost"
(diagnostic data Byte 3).
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
6-63
Chapter 6 Analog input modules
Technical data
Electrical data
Number of inputs
Cycle time (all channels)
measuring range
- Voltage measuring
- Current measuring
Input resistance
Power supply
Current consumption
Isolation
Status indicators
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Process alarm data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
6-64
Manual VIPA System 200V
VIPA 231-1FD00
4 differential inputs
< 1ms
±400mV, ±4V, ±10V
4...20mA, ±20mA
> 2MΩ (voltage range)
< 57Ω (current range)
5V via backplane bus
300mA via backplane bus
500Vrms
(field voltage - backplane bus)
via LEDs on the front
8Byte (1 word per channel)
32Byte
12Byte
4Byte
25.4 x 76 x 88mm
100g
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Chapter 7
Analog output module
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the construction and the operation of
the VIPA analog output module.
Below follows a description of:
• Constructions of the analog output module
• Properties
• Interfacing and schematic diagram
• Technical data
Contents
Topic
Page
Chapter 7
Analog output module .................................................... 7-1
System overview .................................................................................. 7-2
General ................................................................................................ 7-3
232-1BD30 - AO 4x12Bit ±10V, 0 ... 10V - ECO................................... 7-6
232-1BD40 - AO 4x12Bit, 0/4...20mA - ECO ...................................... 7-11
232-1BD51 - AO 4x12Bit, Multi-output ............................................... 7-16
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
7-1
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Manual VIPA System 200V
System overview
Output module
SM 232
Here follows a summary of the analog output modules that are currently
available from VIPA:
SM 232
SM 232
SM 232
AO 4x12Bit
AO 4x12Bit
AO 4x12Bit
L+
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
9
9
I0
I0
I0
VIPA 232-1BD30
VIPA 232-1BD40
VIPA 232-1BD51
X 2
3 4
Order data
output module
7-2
L+
2
1
X 2
3 4
Type
AO 4x12Bit ±10V, 0...10V - ECO
AO 4x12Bit 0/4...20mA - ECO
AO 4x12Bit, multi-output
8
SF
9
X 2
3 4
Order number
VIPA 232-1BD30
VIPA 232-1BD40
VIPA 232-1BD51
Page
7-6
7-11
7-16
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 7 Analog output module
General
Cabling for
analog signals
You must only use screened cable when you are connecting analog
signals. These cables reduce the effect of electrical interference. The
screen of the analog signal cable should be grounded at both ends. In
situations with different electrical potentials, it is possible that a current will
flow to equalize the potential difference. This current could interfere with
the analog signals. Under these circumstances it is advisable to ground the
screen of the signal cable at one end only.
Connecting loads
and actuators
You can use the analog output modules to supply loads and actors with
current or voltage.
Note!
Please take always care of the correct polarity when connecting actuators!
Please leave the output clamps of not used channels disconnected and set
the output type of the channel to "deactivated" in the hardware configurator
from Siemens.
Parameterization
and diagnosis
during runtime
By using the SFCs 55, 56 and 57 you may change the parameters of the
analog modules during runtime via the CPU 21x.
For diagnosis evaluation during runtime, you may use the SFCs 51 and 59.
They allow you to request detailed diagnosis information and to react to it.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
7-3
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Numeric notation
in Siemens S5format
Manual VIPA System 200V
In Siemens S5 format, input data is saved in a word. The word consists of
the binary value and the information bits.
Please regard only the Siemens S7 format (two's complement) is
supported by the Siemens SIMATIC manager for decimal representation.
When the Siemens S5 format is used the decimal values are incorrectly
represented.
Numeric notation:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: overflow bit
0: value within measuring range
1: measuring range exceeded
Bit 1: error bit (set by internal errors)
Bit 2: activity bit (always 0)
Bit 7 ... 3: binary measured value
1
Bit 6 ... 0: binary measured value
Bit 7: sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V
Voltage
-10V
-5V
0V
5V
10V
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-16384
-8192
0
8192
16384
Hex
C000
E000
0
2000
4000
Decimal
0
8192
16384
Hex
0000
2000
4000
Decimal
0
8192
16384
Hex
0
2000
4000
Decimal
0
8192
16384
Hex
0
2000
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-16384
-8192
0
8192
16384
Hex
C000
E000
0
2000
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
0
8192
16384
Hex
0
2000
4000
Value = 16384 ⋅
U ,
10
U = Value ⋅
10
16384
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
0...10V
Voltage
0V
5V
10V
Formulas for the calculation:
Value = 16384 ⋅
U ,
10
U = Value ⋅
10
16384
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
1...5V
Voltage
1V
3V
5V
4....20mA
Current
4mA
12mA
20mA
Formulas for the calculation:
Value = 16384 ⋅
4
U −1 ,
U = Value ⋅
+1
16384
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 16384 ⋅
16
I −4 ,
I = Value ⋅
+4
16384
16
I: current, Value: decimal value
+/- 20mA
Current
-20mA
-10mA
0mA
10mA
20mA
0...20mA
Current
0mA
10mA
20mA
7-4
Value = 16384 ⋅
I ,
20
I = Value ⋅
20
16384
I: current, Value: decimal value
Formulas for the calculation:
Value = 16384 ⋅
I ,
20
I = Value ⋅
20
16384
I: current, Value: decimal value
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Numeric notation
in Siemens
S7-format
Chapter 7 Analog output module
The analog values is represented in two’s complement format.
Numeric representation:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 7 ... 0: binary measured vale
1
Bit 6 ... 0: binary measured vale
Bit 7: sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V
Voltage
-10V
-5V
0V
5V
10V
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
27648
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
6C00
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0000
3600
6C00
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Current
-20mA
-10mA
0mA
10mA
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
Formulas for the calculation:
20mA
27648
6C00
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
0...10V
Voltage
0V
5V
10V
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
10
U = Value ⋅
10
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Formulas for the calculation:
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
10
U = Value ⋅
10
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
1...5V
Voltage
1V
3V
5V
Formulas for the calculation:
Value = 27648 ⋅
4
U −1 ,
U = Value ⋅
+1
27648
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
4....20mA
Current
4mA
12mA
20mA
Value = 27648 ⋅
I −4,
16
I = Value ⋅
+4
16
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
+/- 20mA
Value = 27648 ⋅
I ,
20
I = Value ⋅
20
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
0...20mA
Current
0mA
10mA
20mA
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Formulas for the calculation:
Value = 27648 ⋅
I ,
20
I = Value ⋅
20
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
7-5
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Manual VIPA System 200V
232-1BD30 - AO 4x12Bit ±10V, 0 ... 10V - ECO
Order data
AO 4x12Bit, ±10V, 0 ... 10V
Description
This module provides 4 outputs that can be configured individually. The
module occupies a total of 8Byte of output data (2Byte per channel) in the
process image. These values have to be defined as left justified two’s
complement entries.
Galvanic isolation between the channels on the module and the backplane
bus is provided by means of DC/DC optocouplers. The module requires an
external supply of DC 24V.
Properties
• 4 outputs with common ground
• Outputs with individually configurable functions
• Suitable for connection to actuators requiring ±10V or 0 … 10V inputs
VIPA 232-1BD30
[1]
Construction
1
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
3
Label for the name of
the module
Label for the bit address
with description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
L+
Description
SM 232
LED (green)
supply voltage is on
AO 4x12Bit
L+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I0
X 2
3 4
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DC 24V supply voltage
+ Channel 0
Channel 0 common
+ Channel 1
Channel 1 common
+ Channel 2
Channel 2 common
+ Channel 3
Channel 3 common
Supply voltage common
VIPA 232-1BD30
7-6
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Wiring diagram
1
Schematic diagram
L+
Output
2
D
3
+0
A
4
Channel 0
M0
5
V-Bus
DC 24V
6
µP
D
+1
A
Channel 1
.
.
.
7
8
M1
9
10
Data output
M
The value of the output data is entered into the data output area. For every
channel you may configure the relationship between the output value and
the respective voltage value by means of a function-no.
The following table shows the structure of the data output area:
Data output area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Note!
When new values are transferred from the CPU to the module, the module
needs one cycle to update all outputs abbr. if the analog values change
within this cycle, these are at least available at the concerning outputs at
the end of the next following cycle.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
7-7
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Parameter data
6Byte of parameter data are available for the configuration data. These
parameters are stored in non-volatile memory and are available after the
unit has been powered off.
The following table shows the structure of the parameter data:
Parameter area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Default
0, 1
reserved
00h
2
Function-no. channel 0
09h
3
Function-no. channel 1
09h
4
Function-no. channel 2
09h
5
Function-no. channel 3
09h
Function-no.
allocation
The assignment of a function-no. to a certain channel happens during
parameterization. The function-no. 00h does not influence the function-no.
stored in the permanent parameterization data.
Assigning FFh deactivates the according channel.
No.
Function
Output range
00h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
01h
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S5 format
±12.5V
12.5V = max. value before over range (20480)
-10...10V = rated range (-16384...16384)
-12.5V = min. value before under range (-20480)
two's complement
05h
Voltage 0...10V
Siemens S5 format
0...12.5V
12.5V = max. value before over range (20480)
0...10V = rated range (0...16384)
no under range available
two's complement
09h
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S7 format
±11.76V
11.76V= max. value before over range (32511)
-10V...10V = rated range (-27648...27648)
-11.76 = min. value before under range (-32512)
two's complement
0Dh
Voltage 0...10V
Siemens S7 format
0...11.76V
11.76V = max. value before over range (32511)
0...10V = rated range (0...27648)
no under range available
two's complement
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
Note!
• The module is preset to the range "±10V voltage" in S7-format from
Siemens.
• When cross over or underdrive range all modes return the value 0.
7-8
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Technical data
Electrical data
VIPA 232-1BD30
Number of output channels
4
Length of cable: shielded
200m
Supply voltage
DC 24V
- Inverse polarity protection
yes
Potential separation
- between channels / backplane bus
yes
- between channel / power supply of
the electronic
yes
- between the channels
no
- channels/load voltage L+
yes
Permitted potential difference
- between the inputs and
MINTERNAL (UISO)
DC 75V / AC 60V
Isolation proofed with
DC 500V
Current consumption
- via backplane bus
60mA
- from load voltage L+ (without load)
100mA
Power dissipation of the module
2.7W
Analog value calculation output channels
Resolution (incl. Overdrive region)
±10V
11Bit + sign
0...10V
11Bit
Cycle time (all channels)
700µs
Settling time
- impedance load
1.5ms
- capacitive load
3.0ms
- inductive load
Suppression of interference, limits of error output channels
Crosstalk between the outputs
> 40dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, referring to input range)
Measuring range
Tolerance
Voltage output
±10V
0...10V
Basic error limit (during temperature is 25°C, referring to input range)
Voltage output
Temperature error
(with reference to the output range)
Linearity error
(with reference to the output range)
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C
referred to the output range)
Output ripple;
range 0 to 50kHz
(referred to output range)
±0.2%
±0.4%
Measuring range
Tolerance
±10V
0...10V
±0.1%
±0.2%
±0.01%/K
±0.05%
±0.05%
±0.05%
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
7-9
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Manual VIPA System 200V
... continue
Data for choosing an actuator
Output ranges (rated values)
Voltage
±10V
0...10V
Burden resistance (in nominal range of the output)
at voltage outputs
min. 5kΩ
- capacitive load
max. 1µF
Voltage outputs
Short-circuit protection
yes
Short-circuit current
max. 6mA
Destruction limit against voltages/currents
applied from outside
Voltage at outputs to MANA
max. 15V
Current
max. 30mA
Connection of actuators
for voltage output
2conductor connection
States, Alarms, Diagnosis
Diagnosis alarm
Diagnosis functions
Sum error monitor
Diagnostic information readable
Substitute value can be applied
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
8Byte (1 word per channel)
Parameter data
6Byte
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD)
25.4x76x88mm
Weight
100g
7-10
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 7 Analog output module
232-1BD40 - AO 4x12Bit, 0/4...20mA - ECO
Order data
AO 4x12Bit, 0...20mA, 4 ... 20mA
Description
This module provides 4 outputs that can be configured individually. The
module occupies a total of 8Byte of output data (2Byte per channel) in the
process image. These values have to be defined as left justified two’s
complement entries.
Galvanic isolation between the channels on the module and the backplane
bus is provided by means of DC/DC optocouplers. The module requires an
external supply of DC 24V.
Properties
• 4 outputs with common ground
• Outputs with individually configurable functions
• Suitable for actuators with 0 ... 20mA or 4 ... 20mA input
[1]
Construction
1
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
3
VIPA 232-1BD40
Label for the name of
the module
Label for the bit address
with description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
L+
Description
SM 232
LED (green)
supply voltage is on
AO 4x12Bit
L+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I0
X 2
3 4
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DC 24V supply voltage
+ Channel 0
Channel 0 common
+ Channel 1
Channel 1 common
+ Channel 2
Channel 2 common
+ Channel 3
Channel 3 common
Supply voltage common
VIPA 232-1BD40
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
7-11
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring diagram
1
Schematic diagram
L+
Output
2
D
3
+0
A
4
Channel 0
M0
5
V-Bus
DC 24V
6
µP
D
+1
A
Channel 1
.
.
.
7
8
M1
9
10
Data output
M
The value of the output data is entered into the data output area. For every
channel you may configure the relationship between the output value and
the respective current value by means of a function-no.
The following table shows the structure of the data output area:
Data output area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Note!
When new values are transferred from the CPU to the module, the module
needs one cycle to update all outputs abbr. if the analog values change
within this cycle, these are at least available at the concerning outputs at
the end of the next following cycle.
7-12
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Parameter data
6Byte of parameter data are available for the configuration data. These
parameters are stored in non-volatile memory and are available after the
unit has been powered off.
The following table shows the structure of the parameter data:
Parameter area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Default
0, 1
reserved
00h
2
Function-no. channel 0
0Eh
3
Function-no. channel 1
0Eh
4
Function-no. channel 2
0Eh
5
Function-no. channel 3
0Eh
Function-no.
allocation
The assignment of a function-no. to a certain channel happens during
parameterization. The function-no. 00h does not influence the function-no.
stored in the permanent parameterization data.
Assigning FFh deactivates the according channel.
No.
Function
00h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
Output range
04h
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S5 format
0...24mA
24mA = max. value before over range (20480)
4...20mA = rated range (0...16384)
0mA = min. value before under range (-4096)
two’s complement
06h
Current 0...20mA
Siemens S5 format
0...25mA
25mA = max. value before over range (20480)
0...20mA = rated range (0...16384)
no under range available
two’s complement
0Ch
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S7 format
0...22.81mA
22.81mA = max. value before over range (32511)
4...20mA = rated range (0...27648)
0mA = min. value before under range (-6912)
two’s complement
0Eh
Current 0...20mA
Siemens S7 format
0...23.52mA
23.52mA = max. value before over range (32511)
0...20mA = rated range (0...27648)
no under range available
two’s complement
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
Note!
• The module is preset to the range "0...20mA" in S7-format from
Siemens.
• When cross over or underdrive range all modes return the value 0.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
7-13
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Technical data
Electrical data
VIPA 232-1BD40
Number of output channels
4
Length of cable: shielded
200m
Supply voltage
DC 24V
- Inverse polarity protection
yes
Potential separation
- between channels / backplane bus
yes
- between channel / power supply of
the electronic
yes
- between the channels
no
- between channels/load voltage L+
yes
Permitted potential difference
- between the inputs and
MINTERNAL (UISO)
DC 75V / AC 60V
Isolation proofed with
DC 500V
Current consumption
- via backplane bus
60mA
- from load voltage L+ (without load)
50mA
Power dissipation of the module
1.5W
Analog value calculation output channels
Resolution (incl. Overdrive region)
0...20mA
12Bit
4...20mA
11Bit
Cycle time
700µs
Settling time
- impedance load
0.03ms
- capacitive load
- inductive load
1.5ms
Suppression of interference, limits of error output channels
Crosstalk between the outputs
> 40dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, referring to input range)
Measuring range
Tolerance
Current output
0...20mA
4...20mA
Basic error limit (during temperature is 25°C, referring to input range)
Current output
Temperature error
(with reference to the output range)
Linearity error
(with reference to the output range)
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C
referred to the output range)
Output ripple;
range 0 to 50kHz
(referred to output range)
±0.4%
±0.5%
Measuring range
Tolerance
0...20mA
4...20mA
±0.2%
±0.3%
±0.01%/K
±0.05%
±0.05%
±0.05%
continued ...
7-14
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 7 Analog output module
... continue
Data for choosing an actuator
Output ranges (rated values)
Current
0...20mA
4...20mA
Burden resistance (in nominal range of the output)
at current outputs
max. 350Ω
inductive load
max. 10mH
Current outputs
No-load voltage
12V
Destruction limit against voltages/currents
applied from outside
Voltage at outputs to MANA
max. 12V
Current
max. 30mA
Connection of actuators
for current output
2conductor connection
States, Alarms, Diagnosis
Diagnosis alarm
Diagnosis functions
Sum error monitor
Diagnostic information readable
Substitute value can be applied
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
8Byte (1 word per channel)
Parameter data
6Byte
Diagnostic data
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD)
25.4x76x88mm
Weight
100g
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
7-15
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Manual VIPA System 200V
232-1BD51 - AO 4x12Bit, Multi-output
Order data
AO 4x12Bit Multi-output
VIPA 232-1BD51
Please be aware that this Module cannot be operated on a Profibus DP
slave with revision level 4 or less. In this case please use our (spare-part)
Module with order-no.: VIPA 232-1BD50 which has the identical function.
Description
This module provides 4 outputs that can be configured individually. The
module occupies a total of 8Byte of output data (2Byte per channel) in the
process image. These values have to be defined as left justified two’s
complement entries.
Galvanic isolation between the channels on the module and the backplane
bus is provided by means of DC/DC converters and optocouplers. The
module requires an external supply of DC 24V.
Properties
• 4 outputs with common ground
• Outputs with individually configurable functions
• Suitable for connection to actuators requiring ±10V, 1 ... 5V, 0 … 10V,
±20mA, 4 … 20mA or 0 ... 20mA inputs
• Diagnostic LED and diagnostic function
[1]
Construction
1
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
3
Label for the name of
the module
Label for the bit address
with description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
4
Status indicator
pin assignment
LED
SF
Description
Diagnostic LED (red)
turned on by:
- a short circuit is
detected at the control
voltage output
- an open circuit is
detected on the
current output line
- wrong parameter at
module
- the module does not
receive supply voltage
SM 232
AO 4x12Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SF
9
I0
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DC 24V supply voltage
+ Channel 0
Channel 0 common
+ Channel 1
Channel 1 common
+ Channel 2
Channel 2 common
+ Channel 3
Channel 3 common
Supply voltage common
X 2
3 4
VIPA 232-1BD51
7-16
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Wiring diagram
1
Schematic diagram
L+
Output
2
D
3
+0
A
4
Channel 0
M0
5
V-Bus
DC 24V
6
µP
D
+1
A
Channel 1
.
.
.
7
8
M1
9
10
Data output
M
The value of the output data is entered into the data output area. For every
channel you may configure the relationship between the output value and
the respective current or voltage by means of a function-no..
The following table shows the structure of the data output area:
Data output area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Note!
When new values are transferred from the CPU to the module, the module
needs one cycle to update all outputs abbr. if the analog values change
within this cycle, these are at least available at the concerning outputs at
the end of the next following cycle.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
7-17
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Parameter data
Manual VIPA System 200V
6Byte of parameter data are available for the configuration data. These
parameters are stored in non-volatile memory and are available after the
unit has been powered off.
The following table shows the structure of the parameter data:
Parameter area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Diagnostic alarm byte:
Bit 5 ... 0: reserved
Bit 6: 0: diagnostic alarm inhibited
1: diagnostic alarm enabled
Bit 7: reserved
1
reserved
2
Function-no. channel 0
3
Function-no. channel 1
4
Function-no. channel 2
5
Function-no. channel 3
Parameter
Diagnostic alarm
You can enable diagnostic alarms by means of Bit 6 of Byte 0. When an
error occurs 4 diagnostic bytes are transmitted to the master system.
Function-no.
Here you enter the function-no. of the output function for every channel.
The relationship between the function number and the output functions is
available from the function-no. allocation table.
Diagnostic data
When you enable alarms in Byte 0 of the parameter area, modules will
transfer 4 diagnostic bytes with pre-defined contents to your master in case
of an error. Please note that analog modules only use the first two bytes for
diagnostic purposes. The remaining bytes are not used.
The structure of the diagnostic bytes is as follows:
Diagnostic data:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: Module malfunction
Bit 1: reserved
Bit 2: External error
Bit 3: Channel error present (wire break/short circuit)
Bit 6 ... 4: reserved
Bit 7: Wrong parameter at module
1
Bit 3 ... 0: class of module
0101 analog module
Bit 4: channel information available
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
2
not assigned
3
not assigned
7-18
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Function-no.
allocation
No.
00h
01h
02h
05h
09h
0Ah
0Dh
03h
04h
06h
0Bh
0Ch
0Eh
FFh
Chapter 7 Analog output module
The assignment of a function-no. to a certain channel happens during
parameterization.
Function
Output range
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
Voltage ±10V
±12.5V
Siemens S5 format
12.5V = max. value before over range (20480)
(two's complement)
-10...10V = rated range (-16384...16384)
-12.5V = min. value before under range (-20480)
Voltage 1...5V
0...6V
Siemens S5 format
6V = max. value before over range (20480)
(two's complement)
1...5V = rated range (0...16384)
0V = min. value before under range (-4096)
Voltage 0...10V
0...12.5V
Siemens S5 format
12.5V = max. value before over range (20480)
(two's complement)
0...10V = rated range (0...16384)
no under range available
Voltage ±10V
±11.76V
Siemens S7 format
11.76V= max. value before over range (32511)
(two's complement)
-10V...10V = rated range (-27648...27648)
-11.76 = min. value before under range (-32512)
Voltage 1...5V
0...5.704V
Siemens S7 format
5.704V = max. value before over range (32511)
(two's complement)
1...5V = rated range (0...27648)
0V = min. value before under range (-6912)
Voltage 0...10V
0...11.76V
Siemens S7 format
11.76V = max. value before over range (32511)
(two's complement)
0...10V = rated range (0...27648)
no under range available
Current ±20mA
Siemens S5 format
(two’s complement)
±25mA
25mA = max. value before over range (20480)
-20...20mA = rated range (-16384...16384)
-25mA = min. value before under range (-20480)
Current 4...20mA
0...24mA
Siemens S5 format
24mA = max. value before over range (20480)
(two’s complement)
4...20mA = rated range (0...16384)
0mA = min. value before under range (-4096)
Current 0...20mA
0...25mA
Siemens S5 format
25mA = max. value before over range (20480)
(two’s complement)
0...20mA = rated range (0...16384)
no under range available
Current ±20mA
±23.52mA
Siemens S7 format
23.52mA = max. value before over range (32511)
(two’s complement)
-20...20mA = rated range (-27648...27648)
-23.52mA = min. value before under range (-32512)
Current 4...20mA
0...22.81mA
Siemens S7 format
22.81mA = max. value before over range (32511)
(two’s complement)
4...20mA = rated range (0...27648)
0mA = min. value before under range (-6912)
Current 0...20mA
0...23.52mA
23.52mA = max. value before over range (32511)
Siemens S7 format
0...20mA = rated range (0...27648)
(two’s complement)
no under range available
Channel not active (turned off)
Note!
The module is preset to the range "±10V voltage" in Siemens S7-format.
When cross over or underdrive range all modes return the value 0.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
7-19
Chapter 7 Analog output module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Technical data
Electrical data
VIPA 232-1BD51
Number of output channels
4
Length of cable: shielded
200m
Supply voltage
DC 24V
- Inverse polarity protection
yes
Potential separation
- between channels / backplane bus
yes
- between channel / power supply of
the electronic
yes
- between the channels
no
- between channels/load voltage L+
yes
Isolation proofed with
DC 500V
Current consumption
- via backplane bus
75mA
- from load voltage L+ (without load)
60mA
Power dissipation of the module
1.8W
Analog value calculation output channels
Resolution (incl. Overdrive region)
±10V, ±20mA
11Bit + sign
4 ... 20mA, 1 ... 5V
10Bit
0 ... 10V, 0 ... 20mA
11Bit
Conversion time (per channel)
450µs
Settling time
- impedance load
0.05ms
- capacitive load
0.5ms
- inductive load
0.1ms
Suppression of interference, limits of error output channels
Crosstalk between the outputs
> 40dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, referring to input range)
Voltage output
Current output
Measuring range
1 … 5V
0 … 10V
±10V
4 … 20mA
0 … 20mA
±20mA
Tolerance
1)
±0.8%
1)
±0.6%
1)
±0.4%
2)
±0.8%
2)
±0.6%
2)
±0.3%
Basic error limit (during temperature is 25°C, referring to input range)
Voltage output
Current output
Temperature error
(with reference to the output range)
Measuring range
1 … 5V
0 … 10V
±10V
4 … 20mA
0 … 20mA
±20mA
Tolerance
1)
±0.4%
1)
±0.3%
1)
±0.2%
2)
±0.5%
2)
±0.4%
2)
±0.2%
±0.01%/K
continued ...
7-20
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 7 Analog output module
... continue
Linearity error
±0.05%
(with reference to the output range)
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C
±0.05%
referred to the output range)
Output ripple;
±0.05%
range 0 to 50kHz
(referred to output range)
Data for choosing an actuator
Output ranges (rated values)
Voltage
1 ... 5V, 0 ... 10V, ±10V
Current
4 ... 20mA, 0 ... 20mA, ±20mA
Burden resistance (in nominal range of the output)
at voltage outputs
min. 1kΩ
- capacitive load
max. 1µF
at current outputs
max. 500Ω
- inductive load
max. 10mH
Voltage outputs
Short-circuit protection
yes
Short-circuit current
max. 31mA
Current outputs
No-load voltage
max. 13V
Destruction limit against voltages/currents
applied from outside
Voltage at outputs to MANA
max. 15V
Current
max. 30mA
Connection of actuators
for voltage output
2conductor connection
for current output
2conductor connection
States, Alarms, Diagnosis
Diagnosis alarm
parameterizable
Diagnosis functions
parameterizable
Sum error monitor
red LED SF
Diagnostic information readable
possible
Substitute value can be applied
no
Programming specifications
Input data
Output data
8Byte (1 word per channel)
Parameter data
6Byte
Diagnostic data
4Byte
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD)
25.4x76x88mm
Weight
100g
1)
The error limits are measured with a load of R=1GΩ. For voltage output the output impedance is 30Ω.
2)
The error limits are measured with a load of R=10Ω.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
7-21
Chapter 7 Analog output module
7-22
Manual VIPA System 200V
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Chapter 8
Analog input/output modules
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the construction and the operation of
the VIPA analog input/output modules.
Below follows a description of:
• A system overview of the analog input/output modules
• Properties
• Construction
• Wiring and schematic diagram
• Parameter data
• Function number allocation
• Technical data
Content
Topic
Page
Chapter 8
Analog input/output modules......................................... 8-1
System overview .................................................................................. 8-2
Security note for range allocation ......................................................... 8-2
General ................................................................................................ 8-3
234-1BD50 - AI 2/AO 2x12Bit - Multiin-/output ..................................... 8-4
234-1BD60 - AI 4/AO 2x12Bit - Multiin-/output ................................... 8-18
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
8-1
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
System overview
Input/output
modules SM 234
Here follows a summary of the analog input/output modules that are
currently available from VIPA:
AI4/AO2 x12Bit
SM 234
AI2/AO2 x12Bit
L+
1
+0
2
M0
3
+1
4
M1
5
Q0
6
M0
7
Q1
8
M1
9
SF
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 234-1BD50
Order data
input/output
modules
Type
AI2/AO 2x12Bit, multiin-/output
AI4/AO 2x12Bit, multiin-/output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
SF
X 2
4
VIPA 234-1BD60 3
Order number
VIPA 234-1BD50
VIPA 234-1BD60
Page
8-4
8-18
Security note for range allocation
Attention!
Please regard that the described modules have no hardware protection
against wrong parameterization. The allocation of the according measuring
res. output range is only during project engineering.
For example, the modules may be damaged when you connect a voltage at
parameterized current measuring.
Please be extremely careful during project engineering.
8-2
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
General
Cabling for
analog signals
You must only use screened twisted-pair cable for analog signals. These
cables reduce the effect of electrical interference. The screen of the analog
signal cable should be grounded at both ends. In situations where the
cable ends are at different electrical potentials, it is possible that a current
will flow to equalize the potential difference. This current could interfere
with the analog signals. Under these circumstances it is advisable to
ground the screen of the signal cable at one end only.
Connecting
sensors
Our analog modules provide a large number of configuration options
suitable for 2wire and 4wire transducers. Please remember that
transducers require an external power source. You have to connect an
external power supply in line with any 2wire transducer.
The following diagram explains the connection of 2- and 4wire transducers:
2wire interfacing
transducer
Connecting loads
and actuators
4wire interfacing
transducer
Due to the fact that actuators also require a source of external power, they
may also be connected with 2 or 4wires. Where control signals are
supplied to 2wire actuators a power supply has to be connected in series
with the control cable. 4wire actuators need an external power source.
Note!
Please ensure that you connect actuators to the correct polarity!
Unused output terminals must not be connected!
Parameterization
and diagnosis
during runtime
By using the SFCs 55, 56 and 57 you may change the parameters of the
analog modules during runtime via the CPU 21x.
For diagnosis evaluation during runtime, you may use the SFCs 51 and 59.
They allow you to request detailed diagnosis information and to react to it.
Attention!
Temporarily not used inputs have to be connected with the concerning
ground at activated channel. When deactivating unused channels by
means of FFh, this is not required.
The following circumstances may cause damages at the analog module:
• The external supply of the input (current/voltage) must not be present as
long as the backplane bus of the CPU is still without current supply!
• Parameterization and connection of the input must be congruent!
• You must not apply a voltage >15V to the input!
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
8-3
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
234-1BD50 - AI 2/AO 2x12Bit - Multiin-/output
Order data
AI 2/AO 2x12Bit Multiin-/output
Description
This module has 2 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs that may be
configured individually. The module occupies a total of 4Byte of input and
4Byte of output data.
Galvanic isolation between the channels on the module and the backplane
bus is provided by means of DC/DC converters and optocouplers. The
module requires an external supply of DC 24V.
Properties
• 2 inputs and 2 outputs with common ground
• In-/Outputs with individually configurable functions
• Suitable for encoder res. actuators with in- res. output ranges of:
±10V, 1...5V, 0...10V, ±20mA, 0...20mA or 4...20mA
• Diagnostic LED
Construction
VIPA 234-1BD50
Label for the name of
the module
Label for the bit address
with description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
[1]
1
[2]
2
[3]
[4]
3
4
Status indicator
Pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DC 24V supply voltage
pos. connection Ch.0
Ground Channel 0
pos. connection Ch.1
Ground Channel 1
pos. connection Ch.2
Ground Channel 2
pos. connection Ch.3
Ground Channel 3
Supply voltage Ground
SM 234
AI2/AO2 x12Bit
L+
SF
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage present
Sum error LED (red)
turned on as soon as an
channel error is detected
res. an entry in the
diagnostic bytes happened
L+
1
+0
2
M0
3
+1
4
M1
5
Q0
6
M0
7
Q1
8
M1
9
SF
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 234-1BD50
8-4
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Circuit and
schematic
diagram
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Circuit diagram
1
Schematic diagram
L+ DC24V
Input / Output
2
3
IN
V
+0
A
Channel 0
D
4
5
IN
Mux
A
Channel 1
µP
D
Q0
A
Channel 2
M0
Q1
D
OUT
M0
+0
M1
OUT
8
9
A
V-Bus
6
7
V
A
Channel 3
M1
10 M
Attention!
The following circumstances may cause damages at the analog module:
• The external supply of the input (current/voltage) must not be present as
long as the backplane bus of the CPU is still without current supply!
• Parameterization and connection of the input must be congruent!
• You must not apply a voltage >15V to the input!
Data input/
data output range
Data input range:
During the measuring, the measuring values are stored in the data input
area with the following assignment.:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
Note!
At 3wire res. 4wire measuring, only channel 0 is used.
Data output range:
For output of the data you set a value in the data output area. The
functionality can be set by means of function-no. for each channel.
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 2
1
Low-Byte channel 2
2
High-Byte channel 3
3
Low-Byte channel 3
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
8-5
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Parameter data
Manual VIPA System 200V
12Byte of parameter data are available for the configuration. These
parameters are stored in non-volatile memory and are available after the
unit has been powered off.
The following table shows the structure of the parameter data:
Parameter area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Wire break recognition and diagnostic alarm:
Bit 0: Wire break recognition channel 0
0: deactivated
1: activated
Bit 1: Wire break recognition channel 1
0: deactivated
1: activated
Bit 5 ... 2: reserved
Bit 6: 0: diagnostic alarm inhibited
1: diagnostic alarm enabled
Bit 7: reserved
1
reserved
Bit 0: reserved
Bit 1: reserved
Bit 2: CPU-Stop reaction for channel 2
0: Set replacement value channel 2*)
1: Store last value channel 2
Bit 3: CPU-Stop reaction for channel 3
0: Set replacement value channel 3
1: Store last value channel 3
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
2
Function-no. channel 0
(see table input ranges)
3
Function-no. channel 1
(see table input ranges)
4
Function-no. channel 2
(see table input ranges)
5
Function-no. channel 3
(see table input ranges)
6
Meas. cycle channel 0
7
Meas. cycle channel 1
8
High-Byte replacement value channel 2
9
Low-Byte replacement value channel 2
10
High-Byte replacement value channel 3
11
Low-Byte replacement value channel 3
*)
8-6
Default
00h
00h
28h
28h
09h
09h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
If you want to get 0A res. 0V as output value at CPU-STOP, you have to set the
following replacement values at current output (4...20mA) res. voltage output (1...5V):
E500h for the S7 format from Siemens and F000h for the S5 format from Siemens.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Parameter
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Wire break recognition
The Bits 0 and 1 of Byte 0 allow you to activate the wire break recognition
for the input channels. The wire break recognition is only available for the
current measuring range of 4...20mA. A wire break is recognized when the
current input during current measuring sinks under 1.18mA.
A wire break at activated wire break recognition causes an entry in the
diagnosis area. This is shown via the SF-LED.
If additionally a diagnostic alarm is activated, a diagnosis message is sent
to the superordinated system.
Diagnostic alarm
With the help of Bit 6 of Byte 0, you may release the diagnostic alarm. In
case of an error, the record set 0 with a size of 4Byte is transferred to the
superordinated system.
More detailed information is to find below under "Diagnostic data".
CPU-Stop reaction and replacement value
With Bit 2 and 3 of Byte 1 and Byte 8 ... 11 you may set the reaction of the
module at CPU-Stop for every output channel.
Via Byte 8 ... 11 you predefine a replacement value for the output channel
as soon as the CPU switches to Stop.
By setting Bit 2 res. 3, the last output value remains in the output at CPUStop. A reset sets the replacement value.
Function-no.
Here you set the function-no. of your measuring res. output function for
every channel. Please see the according table next page.
Meas. cycle
Here you may set the transducer velocity for every input channel. Please
regard that a higher transducer velocity causes a lower resolution because
of the lower integration time.
The data transfer format remains unchanged. Only the lower Bits (LSBs)
are not longer relevant for the analog value.
Structure Meas. cycle Byte:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
6 ... 7 Bit 3 ... 0: Velocity per channel
0000 15 conversions/s
0001 30 conversions/s
0010 60 conversions/s
0011 123 conversions/s
0100 168 conversions/s
0101 202 conversions/s
0110 3,7 conversions/s
0111 7,5 conversions/s
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Resolution
Default
00h
16
16
15
14
12
10
16
16
8-7
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Function-no.
assignment
The assignment of a function-no. to a certain channel happens during
parameterization. The function-no. 00h does not influence the function-no.
stored in the permanent parameterization data.
By entering FFh you may deactivate the concerning channel.
The following tables list all functions that are supported by the depending
channel.
Note!
When exceeding the overdrive region, the value 7FFFh (32767) is thrown,
at underrun of the underdrive region the value is 8000h (-32768).
Input range (channel 0, channel 1)
No.
Function
Measuring range / representation
00h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data.
3Bh
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S5 format
±12.5V /
12.5V = End overdrive region (20480)
-10...10V = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-12.5V = End underdrive region (-20480)
two’s complement
2Bh
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S5 format
±12.5V /
12.5V = End overdrive region (20480)
-10...10V = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-12.5V = End underdrive region (-20480)
Value and sign
72h
Voltage 1...5V
Siemens S5 format
0...6V
6V = End overdrive region (20480)
1...5V = nominal range (0...16384)
0V = End underdrive region (-4096)
Value and sign
75h
Voltage 0...10V
Siemens S5 format
0...12.5V
12.5V = End overdrive region (20480)
0...10V = nominal range (0...16384)
no underdrive region available
28h
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S7 format
±11.76V /
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
-10...10V= nominal range (-27648...27648)
-11.76V= End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
7Ah
Voltage 1...5V
Siemens S7 format
0...5.704V
5.704V = End overdrive region (32511)
1...5V = nominal range (0...27648)
0V = End underdrive region (-6912)
two’s complement
continued ...
8-8
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
... continue function-no. input range (channel 0, channel 1)
No.
Function
Measuring range / representation
7Dh
Voltage 0...10V
Siemens S7 format
0...11.76V
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
0...10V = nominal range (0...27648)
no underdrive region available
3Ah
Current ±20mA
Siemens S5 format
±25.0mA /
25.0mA = End overdrive region (20480)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-25.0mA = End underdrive region (-20480)
two’s complement
2Fh
Current ±20mA
Siemens S5 format
±25.0mA /
25.0mA = End overdrive region (20480)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-25.0mA = End underdrive region (-20480)
value and sign
2Eh
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S5 format
0.8...+24.0mA /
24.0mA = End overdrive region(20480)
4 ... 20mA = nominal range (0...16384)
0.8mA = End underdrive region (-3277)
value and sign
76h
Current 0...20mA
Siemens S5 format
0...25mA
25mA = End overdrive region (20480)
0...20mA = nominal range (0...16384)
no underdrive region available
2Ch
Current ±20mA
Siemens S7 format
±23.51mA /
23.51mA = End overdrive region (32511)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-27648...27648)
-23.51mA = End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
2Dh
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S7 format
1.185...+22.81mA /
22.81mA = End overdrive region (32511)
4...20mA = nominal range (0...27648)
1.18mA = End underdrive region (-4864)
two’s complement
7Eh
Current 0...20mA
Siemens S7 format
0...23.52mA
23.52mA = End overdrive region (32511)
0...20mA = nominal range (0...27648)
no underdrive region available
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
Note!
The module is preset to the range "±10V voltage" in S7 format from
Siemens.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
8-9
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Output range (Channel 2, Channel 3)
No.
Function
Output or input range
00h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
01h
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S5 format
±12.5V
12.5V = End overdrive region (20480)
-10...10V = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-12.5V = End underdrive region (-20480)
02h
Voltage 1...5V
Siemens S5 format
0...6V
6V = End overdrive region (20480)
1...5V = nominal range (0...16384)
0V = End underdrive region (-4096)
05h
Voltage 0...10V
Siemens S5 format
0...12.5V
12.5V = End overdrive region (20480)
0...10V = nominal range (0...16384)
no underdrive region available
09h
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S7 format
±11.76V
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
-10V...10V = nominal range (-27648...27648)
-11.76 = End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
0Ah
Voltage 1...5V
Siemens S7 format
0...5.704V
5.704V = End overdrive region (32511)
1...5V = nominal range (0...27648)
0V = End underdrive region (-6912)
two’s complement
0Dh
Voltage 0...10V
Siemens S7 format
0...11.76V
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
0...10V = nominal range (0...27648)
no underdrive region available
03h
Current ±20mA
Siemens S5 format
±25.0mA
25mA = End overdrive region (20480)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-16384...16384)
-25mA = End underdrive region (20480)
04h
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S5 format
0...24mA
24mA = End overdrive region (20480)
4...20mA = nominal range (0...16384)
0mA = End underdrive region (-4096)
continued ...
8-10
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
... continue function-no. output range (channel 2, channel 3)
No.
Function
Output or input range
06h
Current 0...20mA
Siemens S5 format
0...25mA
25mA = End overdrive region (20480)
0...20mA = nominal range (0...16384)
no underdrive region available
0Bh
Current ±20mA
Siemens S7 format
±23.52mA
23.52mA = End overdrive region (32511)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-27648...27648)
-23.52mA = End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
0Ch
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S7 format
0...22.81mA
22.81mA = End overdrive region (32511)
4...20mA = nominal range (0...27648)
0mA = End underdrive region (-6912)
two’s complement
0Eh
Current 0...20mA
Siemens S7 format
0...23.52mA
23.52mA = End overdrive region (32511)
0...20mA = nominal range (0...27648)
no underdrive region available
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
Note!
Leaving the defined range, the output is 0V res. 0A!
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
8-11
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Numeric notation
in Siemens
S5 format
In Siemens S5 format, input data is saved into a word. The word consists
of the binary value and the information bits.
Please regard only the Siemens S7 format (two's complement) is
supported by the Siemens SIMATIC manager for decimal representation.
When the Siemens S5 format is used the decimal values are incorrectly
represented.
Numeric notation:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: overflow bit
0: value within measuring range
1: measuring range exceeded
Bit 1: error bit (set by internal errors)
Bit 2: activity bit (always 0)
Bit 7 ... 3: binary measured value
1
Bit 6 ... 0: binary measured value
Bit 7: sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V (two's complement)
Voltage
-10V
-5V
0V
5V
10V
Decimal
-16384
-8192
0
8192
16384
Hex
C000
E000
0000
2000
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
Value = 16384 ⋅
Decimal
-16384
-8192
0
8192
16384
Hex
C000
A000
0000
2000
4000
Decimal
0
8192
16384
High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
Low Byte
2
1
0
7
6
Decimal
-16384
-8192
0
8192
16384
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
value
sign
Numeric notation
Hex
0000
2000
4000
High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
Low Byte
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
value
+/- 20mA (two's complement)
Current
-20mA
-10mA
0mA
10mA
20mA
10
16384
Numeric notation
4 ... 20mA / 1 ... 5V (value and sign)
Current / Voltage
4mA / 1V
12mA / 3V
20mA / 5V
U = Value ⋅
U: voltage, Value: Decimal value
+/- 10V (value and sign)
Voltage
-10V
-5V
0V
5V
10V
U ,
10
sign
Hex
C000
E000
0000
2000
4000
Formula for the calculation:
Value = 16384 ⋅
I ,
20
I = Value ⋅
20
16384
I: Current, Value: Decimal value
+/- 20mA (value and sign)
Current
-20mA
-10mA
0mA
10mA
20mA
8-12
Decimal
-16384
-8192
0
8192
16384
Hex
C000
A000
0000
2000
4000
Numeric notation
High Byte
7
6
5
4
3
Low Byte
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
value
sign
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Numeric notation
in Siemens
S7 format
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
The analog values are represented in two’s complement format.
Numeric representation:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 7 ... 0: binary measured vale
1
Bit 6 ... 0: binary measured vale
Bit 7: sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V
Voltage
-10V
-5V
0V
5V
10V
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
27648
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
6C00
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0000
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-27648
0
27648
Hex
9400
0
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-27648
0
27648
Hex
9400
0
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
27648
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
10
U = Value ⋅
10
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
0...10V
Voltage
0V
5V
10V
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
10
U = Value ⋅
10
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
1...5V
Voltage
1V
3V
5V
+/-4V
Voltage
-4V
0V
4V
+/-400mV
Voltage
-400mV
0V
400mV
4....20mA
Current
4mA
12mA
20mA
Value = 27648 ⋅
4
U −1 ,
U = Value ⋅
+1
27648
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
4
U = Value ⋅
4
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 27648 ⋅
U ,
400
U = Value ⋅
400
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 27648 ⋅
I −4,
16
I = Value ⋅
+4
16
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
+/- 20mA
Current
-20mA
-10mA
0mA
10mA
20mA
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Value = 27648 ⋅
I ,
20
I = Value ⋅
20
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
8-13
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
Diagnostic data
The diagnostic data uses 12Byte and are stored in the record sets 0 and 1
of the system data area.
When you enable the diagnostic alarm in Byte 0 of the parameter area,
modules will transfer record set 0 to the superordinated system when an
error is detected.
Record set 0 has a predefined content and a length of 4Byte. The content
of the record set may be read in plain text via the diagnostic window of the
CPU.
For extended diagnosis during runtime, you may evaluate the 12Byte wide
record set 1 via the SFCs 51 and 59.
Evaluate diagnosis
At present diagnosis, the CPU interrupts the user application and branches
into the OB 82. This OB gives you detailed diagnostic data via the SFCs 51
and 59 when programmed correctly.
After having processed the OB 82, the user application processing is
continued. Until leaving the OB 82, the data remain consistent.
Record set 0
Byte 0 to 3:
Record set 0 (Byte 0 to 3):
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: Module malfunction
Bit 1: reserved
Bit 2: External error
Bit 3: Channel error present
Bit 4: external supply voltage is missing
Bit 5,6: reserved
Bit 7: Wrong parameters in the module
1
Bit 3 ... 0: Module class
0101 Analog module
Bit 4: Channel information present
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
2
reserved
3
reserved
8-14
Default
00h
15h
00h
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Record set 1
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Byte 0 to 11:
The record set 1 contains the 4Byte of record set 0 and additional 8Byte
module specific diagnostic data.
The diagnostic bytes have the following assignment:
Record set 1 (Byte 0 to 11):
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0 ... 3 Content record set 0 (see page before)
4
Bit 6 ... 0: Channel type
70h: Digital input
71h: Analog input
72h: Digital output
73h: Analog output
74h: Analog in-/output
Bit 7: reserved
5
Bit 7 ... 0: Number of diagnostic bits of the module
per channel
6
Bit 7 ... 0: Number of identical channels of a
module
7
Bit 0: Channel error Channel 0
Bit 1: Channel error Channel 1
Bit 2: Channel error Channel 2
Bit 3: Channel error Channel 3
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
8
Bit 0: Wire break Channel 0
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 0
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow Channel 0
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow Channel 0
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
9
Bit 0: Wire break Channel 1
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 1
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow Channel 1
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow Channel 1
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
10
Bit 0: Wire break at current output res. short circuit
at voltage output Channel 2
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 2
Bit 7 ... 2: reserved
11
Bit 0: Wire break at current output res. short circuit
at voltage output Channel 3
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 3
Bit 7 ... 2: reserved
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Default
74h
08h
04h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
8-15
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Technical data
Electrical Data
Number of in-/outputs
Voltage supply
Current consumption
Short circuit current
I/O ranges
Analog value calculation inputs
Parameterized velocity (Hz)
Basic calculation time (ms)
Additional calculation time
(executed once per cycle) (ms)
Additional calculation time for wire
break recognition (ms)
Resolution in Bit
Analogue value calculation outputs
resolution (incl. overdrive region)
±10V, ±20mA
4 ... 20mA, 1 ... 5V
0 ... 10V, 0 ... 20mA
Cycle time
Settling time
- Ohm resistive load
- Capacitive load
- Inductive load
Error limits
- Voltage in-/output
- Current in-/output
8-16
VIPA 234-1BD50
2/2
DC5V via backplane bus
DC24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
Backplane bus: 100mA
DC 24V extern: 100mA
30mA
±10V, 1 ... 5V, 0 ... 10V, ±20mA, 0 ... 20mA, 4 ... 20mA
Calculation time/Resolution
(per channel)
3.7
7.5
15
30
60
123
168
202
268
135
69
35,5 19
10
8
6,75
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
16
16
16
16
15
14
12
10
11Bit + sign
10Bit
11Bit
2.5ms
0.05ms
0.5ms
0.1ms
Measuring range
±10V
0 ... 10V
1 ... 5V
±20mA
0 ... 20mA
4 ... 20mA
Tolerance
±0.2%
±0.4%
±0.6%
±0.3%
±0.6%
±0.8%
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
... continue
Electrical Data
Data for choosing an encoder
- Voltage input
- Current input
Data for choosing an actuator
- Voltage outputs
- Current outputs
Diagnose alarm
Potential separation
Status monitor
Parameter data
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
Measurements and Weight
Measurements (WxHxD)
Weight
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
100kΩ
50Ω
Load resistor
Ohm resistive load - min. 1kΩ
Capacitive load - max. 1µF
Ohm resistive load - max. 500Ω
Capacitive load - max. 10mH
parameterizable
500Vrms
(field voltage – backplane bus)
via LED’s at the front side
4Byte (1 Word per channel)
4Byte (1 Word per channel)
12Byte
12Byte
25.4x76x76mm
100g
8-17
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
234-1BD60 - AI 4/AO 2x12Bit - Multiin-/output
Order data
AI 4/AO 2x12Bit Multiin-/output
Description
This module has 4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs that may be
configured individually. The module occupies a total of 8Byte of input and
4Byte of output data in the periphery area. Galvanic isolation between the
channels on the module and the backplane bus is provided by means of
DC/DC converters and optocouplers.
Properties
• 4inputs and 2 outputs with common ground
• In-/Outputs with individually configurable functions
• Channel 0 to 2 suitable for encoder with input ranges of:
voltage ±10V, 1 ... 5V, 0 ... 10V, ±4V, ±400mV
current ±20mA, 4...20mA or 0 ... 20mA
• Channel 3 suitable for encoder with input ranges of:
Pt100, Pt1000, NI100, NI1000 and
resistant measuring 600Ω, 3000Ω
• Channel 4 to 5 Suitable for actuators with output ranges of:
±10V, 1 ... 5V, 0 ... 10V, ±20mA, 0 ... 20mA or 4 ... 20mA
Construction
VIPA 234-1BD60
[1]
1
[2]
[3]
Label for the name of
the module
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
Status indicator
Pin assignment
LED
Description
Pin
AI4/AO2 x12Bit
SF
Sum error LED (red)
turned on as soon as an
channel error is detected
res. an entry in the
diagnostic bytes happened
SF
VIPA 234-1BD60
8-18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Assignment
DC 24V supply voltage
Voltage measuring Ch. 0
Current measuring Ch. 0
Ground Channel 0
Voltage measuring Ch. 1
Current measuring Ch. 1
Ground Channel 1
Voltage measuring Ch. 2
Current measuring Ch. 2
Ground channel 2
Measuring Ch. 3 (Pt, Ni, R)
Ground 3
Q0 output channel 4
M4 output channel 4
Q1 output channel 5
M5 output channel 5
reserved
Ground Supply voltage
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Circuit and
schematic
diagram
Circuit diagram
Schematic diagram
2
1
1
1
L+
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Input / Output
L+
U0
I0
33
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
33
D
Mux
Rx
OUT
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
M
Ix
18
µP
Channel 2
M2
R3
M3
Channel 3
Rx
11
12
18
33
V-Bus
Channel 1
M1
U2
I2
IN
11
Channel 0
U1
I1
A
7
M0
D
Q0
A
Channel 4
M4
Ω
D
A
Ω
Q1
Channel 5
M5
M
Ω
Attention!
The following circumstances may cause damages at the analog module:
• The external supply of the input (current/voltage) must not be present as
long as the backplane bus of the CPU is still without current supply!
• Parameterization and connection of the input must be congruent!
• You must not apply a voltage >15V to the input!
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
8-19
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Data input/
data output range
Manual VIPA System 200V
Data input range:
During the measuring, the measuring values are stored in the data input
area with the following assignment.:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Data output range:
For output of the data you set a value in the data output area.
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 4
1
Low-Byte channel 4
2
High-Byte channel 5
3
Low-Byte channel 5
8-20
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Parameter data
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
16Byte of parameter data are available for the configuration. These
parameters are stored in non-volatile memory and are available after the
unit has been powered off. By using the SFC 55 "WR_PARM" you may
alter the parameterization in the module during runtime. The time needed
until the new parameterization is valid can last up to 50ms. During this
time, the measuring value output is 7FFFFh.
The following table shows the structure of the parameter data:
Parameter area:
Byte Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Wire break recognition channel 0
Bit 0: 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Wire break recognition channel 1
Bit 1: 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Wire break recognition channel 2
Bit 2: 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Wire break recognition channel 3
Bit 3: 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Bit 4, 5: reserved
Diagnostic alarm
Bit 6: 0 = diagnostic alarm inhibited
1 = diagnostic alarm enabled
Bit 7: reserved
1
Bit 3 … 0: reserved
CPU-Stop reaction for channel 4
Bit 4: 0 = Set replacement value *)
1 = Store last value
CPU-Stop reaction for channel 5
Bit 5: 0 = Set replacement value *)
1 = Store last value
Bit 6, 7: reserved
2
Function-no. channel 0 (see table input ranges)
3
Function-no. channel 1 (see table input ranges)
4
Function-no. channel 2 (see table input ranges)
5
Function-no. channel 3 (see table input ranges)
6
Option-Byte channel 0 (see table next page)
7
Option-Byte channel 1 (see table next page)
8
Option-Byte channel 2 (see table next page)
9
Option-Byte channel 3 (see table next page)
10
Function-no. channel 4 (see table output ranges)
11
Function-no. channel 5 (see table output ranges)
12
High-Byte replacement value channel 4
13
Low-Byte replacement value channel 4
14
High-Byte replacement value channel 5
15
Low-Byte replacement value channel 5
*)
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Default
00h
00h
28h
28h
28h
01h
00h
00h
00h
00h
09h
09h
00h
00h
00h
00h
If you want to get 0A res. 0V as output value at CPU-STOP, you have to set the
following replacement values at current output (4...20mA) res. voltage output (1...5V):
E500h for the S7 format from Siemens.
8-21
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Parameter
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wire break recognition
Via the Bits 0 and 3 of Byte 0, the wire break recognition is activated for the
input channels. The wire break recognition is only available for the current
measuring range of 4...20mA and at (thermo) resistance measuring. A wire
break is recognized when the current input during current measuring sinks
under 1.18mA res. when the resistance at (thermo) resistance measuring
reaches infinite. This causes an entry in the diagnosis area and is shown
via the SF-LED.
If a diagnostic alarm is activated, a diagnosis message is sent to the superordinated system.
Diagnostic alarm
With the help of Bit 6 of Byte 0, you may release the diagnostic alarm. In
case of an error like e.g. wire break, the superordinated system receives
record 0 (4Byte). For an extended diagnosis you may then call record 1
(12Byte).More detailed information is to find below under "Diagnostic data".
CPU-Stop reaction and replacement value
With Bit 4 and 5 of Byte 1 and Byte 12 ... 15 you may set the reaction of
the module at CPU-Stop for every output channel.
Via Byte 12 ... 15 you predefine a replacement value for the output channel
as soon as the CPU switches to Stop.
By setting Bit 4 res. 5, the last output value remains in the output at CPUStop. A reset sets the replacement value.
Function-no.
Here you set the function-no. of your measuring res. output function for
every channel. Please see the according table next page.
Meas. cycle
Here you may set the transducer velocity for every input channel. Please
regard that a higher transducer velocity causes a lower resolution because
of the lower integration time.
The data transfer format remains unchanged. Only the lower Bits (LSBs)
are not longer relevant for the analog value.
Structure Meas. cycle Byte:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
6 ... 7 Bit 3 ... 0: Velocity per channel
0000 15 conversions/s
0001 30 conversions/s
0010 60 conversions/s
0011 120 conversions/s
0100 170 conversions/s
0101 200 conversions/s
0110 3.7 conversions/s
0111 7.5 conversions/s
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
8-22
Resolution
Default
00h
16
16
15
14
12
10
16
16
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Function-no.
assignment
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
The assignment of a function-no. to a certain channel happens during
parameterization. The function-no. 00h does not influence the function-no.
stored in the permanent parameterization data.
By entering FFh you may deactivate the concerning channel.
The following tables list all functions that are supported by the depending
channel.
You may find the connection type mentioned under "connection" at the
"circuit diagram" above.
Note!
When exceeding the overdrive region, the value 7FFFh (32767) is thrown,
at underrun of the underdrive region the value is 8000h (-32768).
Input range (channel 0 … 2)
No.
Function
Measuring range / representation
Connection
00h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data.
7Dh
Voltage 0 … 10V
Siemens S7 format
-1.76 … 11.76V /
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
0...10V= nominal range (0...27648)
-1.76V= End underdrive region (-4864)
two’s complement
(1)
7Ah
Voltage 1 … 5V
Siemens S7 format
0.3 … 5.70V /
5.70V= End overdrive region (32511)
1...5V= nominal range (0...27648)
0.30V= End underdrive region (-4804)
two’s complement
(1)
28h
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S7 format
±11.76V /
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
-10...10V= nominal range (-27648...27648)
-11.76V= End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
(1)
29h
Voltage ±4V
Siemens S7 format
±4.70V /
4.70V= End overdrive region (32511)
-4...4V= nominal range (-27648...27648)
-4.70V= End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
(1)
2Ah
Voltage ±400mV
Siemens S7 format
±470mV /
470mV= End overdrive region (32511)
-400...400mV= nominal range (-27648...27648)
-470mV= End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
(1)
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
8-23
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
... continue function-no. input range (channel 0…2)
No.
Function
Measuring range / representation
Connection
7EH
Current 0 … 20mA
Siemens S7 format
-3.51 … 23.51mA /
23.51mA = End overdrive region (32511)
0...20mA = nominal range (-27648...27648)
-3.51mA = End underdrive region (-4864)
two’s complement
(2)
2Ch
Current ±20mA
Siemens S7 format
±23.51mA /
23.51mA = End overdrive region (32511)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-27648...27648)
-23.51mA = End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
(2)
2Dh
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S7 format
1.185...+22.81mA /
22.81mA = End overdrive region (32511)
4...20mA = nominal range (0...27648)
1.18mA = End underdrive region (-4864)
two’s complement
(2)
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
Input range (channel 3)
No.
Function
00h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data.
01h
Pt100 in 2wire mode
-200 .. +850°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(1, 2)
02h
Pt1000 in 2wire mode
-200 .. +500°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(1, 2)
03h
NI100 in 2wire mode
-50 .. +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(1, 2)
04h
NI1000 in 2wire mode
-50 .. +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
(1, 2)
06h
Resistance measurement
600Ohm 2wire
-/
(1, 2)
07h
Resistance measurement
3000Ohm 2wire
-/
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
8-24
Measuring range / representation
Conn.
600Ω = Limit value (32767)
(1, 2)
3000Ω = Limit value (32767)
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Output range (channel 4, channel 5)
No.
Function
Output range
00h
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
09h
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S7 format
±11.76V
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
-10V...10V = nominal range (-27648...27648)
-11.76 = End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
0Ah
Voltage 1...5V
Siemens S7 format
0...5.704V
5.704V = End overdrive region (32511)
1...5V = nominal range (0...27648)
0V = End underdrive region (-6912)
two’s complement
0Dh
Voltage 0...10V
Siemens S7 format
0...11.76V
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
0...10V = nominal range (0...27648)
no underdrive region available
0Bh
Current ±20mA
Siemens S7 format
±23.52mA
23.52mA = End overdrive region (32511)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-27648...27648)
-23.52mA = End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
0Ch
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S7 format
0...22.81mA
22.81mA = End overdrive region (32511)
4...20mA = nominal range (0...27648)
0mA = End underdrive region (-6912)
two’s complement
0Eh
Current 0...20mA
Siemens S7 format
0...23.52mA
23.52mA = End overdrive region (32511)
0...20mA = nominal range (0...27648)
no underdrive region available
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
Note!
When exceeding the predefined range, 0V res. 0A is shown as value!
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
8-25
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Numeric notation
in Siemens
S7 format
Manual VIPA System 200V
The analog values are represented in two’s complement format.
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 7 ... 0: binary measured value
1
Bit 6 ... 0: binary measured value
Bit 7: sign (0: positive / 1: negative)
+/- 10V
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
27648
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 27648 ⋅ , U = Value ⋅
27648
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Voltage
0V
5V
10V
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
U
10
Value = 27648 ⋅ , U = Value ⋅
27648
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Voltage
1V
3V
5V
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
4
U −1 ,
U = Value ⋅
+1
Value = 27648 ⋅
27648
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Voltage
-4V
0V
4V
Decimal
-27648
0
27648
Hex
9400
0
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
U
4
Value = 27648 ⋅ , U = Value ⋅
4
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Decimal
-27648
0
27648
Hex
9400
0
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
U ,
400
Value = 27648 ⋅
U = Value ⋅
400
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
I −4,
16
Value = 27648 ⋅
I = Value ⋅
+4
16
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
I −4,
16
Value = 27648 ⋅
I = Value ⋅
+4
16
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
27648
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
I ,
20
Value = 27648 ⋅
I = Value ⋅
20
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
Voltage
-10V
-5V
0V
5V
10V
0...10V
1...5V
+/-4V
+/-400mV
Voltage
-400mV
0V
400mV
0....20mA
Current
0mA
12mA
20mA
4....20mA
Current
4mA
12mA
20mA
+/- 20mA
Current
-20mA
-10mA
0mA
10mA
20mA
8-26
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Diagnostic data
The diagnostic data uses 12Byte and are stored in the record sets 0 and 1
of the system data area.
When you enable the diagnostic alarm in Byte 0 of the parameter area,
modules will transfer record set 0 to the superordinated system when an
error is detected.
Record set 0 has a predefined content and a length of 4Byte. The content
of the record set may be read in plain text via the diagnostic window of the
CPU.
For extended diagnosis during runtime, you may evaluate the 12Byte wide
record set 1 via the SFCs 51 and 59.
Evaluate diagnosis
At present diagnosis, the CPU interrupts the user application and branches
into the OB 82. This OB gives you detailed diagnostic data via the SFCs 51
and 59 when programmed correctly.
After having processed the OB 82, the user application processing is
continued. Until leaving the OB 82, the data remain consistent.
Record set 0
Byte 0 to 3:
Record set 0 (Byte 0 to 3):
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0: Module malfunction
Bit 1: reserved
Bit 2: External error
Bit 3: Channel error present
Bit 4: external supply voltage is missing
Bit 5, 6: reserved
Bit 7: Wrong parameters in the module
1
Bit 3 ... 0: Module class
0101 Analog module
Bit 4: Channel information present
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
2
reserved
3
reserved
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Default
00h
15h
00h
00h
8-27
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Record set 1
Manual VIPA System 200V
Byte 0 to 11:
The record set 1 contains the 4Byte of record set 0 and additional 8Byte
module specific diagnostic data.
The diagnostic bytes have the following assignment:
Record set 1 (Byte 0 to 11):
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0 ... 3 Content record set 0 (see page before)
4
Bit 6 ... 0: Channel type
70h: Digital input
71h: Analog input
72h: Digital output
73h: Analog output
74h: Analog in-/output
Bit 7: reserved
5
Bit 7 ... 0: Number of diagnostic bits of the module
per channel
6
Bit 7 ... 0: Number of identical channels of a
module
7
Bit 0: Channel error Channel 0
Bit 1: Channel error Channel 1
Bit 2: Channel error Channel 2
Bit 3: Channel error Channel 3
Bit 4: Channel error Channel 4
Bit 5: Channel error Channel 5
Bit 6, 7: reserved
8
Bit 0: Wire break Channel 0
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 0
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow Channel 0
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow Channel 0
Bit 4: Wire break Channel 1
Bit 5: Parameterization error Channel 1
Bit 6: Measuring range underflow Channel 1
Bit 7: Measuring range overflow Channel 1
9
Bit 0: Wire break Channel 2
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 2
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow Channel 2
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow Channel 2
Bit 4: Wire break Channel 3
Bit 5: Parameterization error Channel 3
Bit 6: Measuring range underflow Channel 3
Bit 7: Measuring range overflow Channel 3
10
Bit 0: Wire break at current output res. short circuit
at voltage output Channel 4
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 4
Bit 2, 3: reserved
Bit 4: Wire break at current output res. short circuit
at voltage output Channel 5
Bit 5: Parameterization error Channel 5
Bit 6, 7: reserved
11
reserved
8-28
Default
74h
04h
06h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Technical Data
Electrical Data
VIPA 234-1BD60
Number of Current-/Voltage input
Number of resistance input
Number of outputs
Length of cable: shielded
3
1
2
200m
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Supply voltage
- reverse polarity protection
Constant current for resistance-type
sensor
Isolation
- channels / backplane bus
- channel / power supply of the
electronic
- between the channels
Permitted potential difference
- between the inputs (UCM)
- between the inputs and MINTERNAL
(UISO)
Isolation tested with
Current consumption
- from the backplane bus
- from the power supply L+
Power dissipation of the module
DC 24V
yes
1.25mA
100mA
60mA (no load)
2W
Analog value calculation input
Conversion time/Resolution (per channel)
Measuring principle
Parameterizable
Conversion rate (Hz)
Integration time (ms)
Basic conversion time (ms)
Resolution (Bit) incl. overrange
Noise suppression for frequency f1 (Hz)
Basic execution time of the module, in
ms (all channels enabled)
Smoothing of the measured values
Sigma-Delta
Yes
200
170
5
6
7
8
10
12
no
28
32
yes
yes
no
DC4V
DC75V/AC60V
DC 500V
120
8
10
14
60
17
19
15
30
33
35
16
40
76
140
15
7.5
67
133
69
135
16
16
50 and 60Hz
276
540
3.7
270
272
16
1088
none
Analog value calculation output
channels
Resolution (incl. overrange)
±10V, ±20mA
4 ... 20mA, 1 ... 5V
0 ... 10V, 0 ... 20mA
Conversion time (per channel)
Settling time
- impedance load
- capacitive load
- inductive load
11Bit + sign
10Bit
11Bit
1.5ms
0.3ms
1.0ms
0.5ms
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
8-29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
... continue
Suppression of interference, limits of error input channels
Noise suppression for f=n x (f1 ±1%) (f1=interference frequency, n=1,2,...)
> 80dB
Common-mode interference
(UCM < 5V)
Series-mode noise (peak value of noise > 80dB
< nominal value of input range
Crosstalk between the inputs
> 50dB
Operational limit (only valid to 120W/s)
(in the entire temperature range, referring to input range)
voltage input
current input
Resistors
Resistance thermometer
Measuring range
±400mV, ±4V, ±10V
1 ... 5V
0 ... 10V
±20mA
0 ... 20mA
4 ... 20mA
0 … 600Ω, 0 …3kΩ
Pt100, Pt1000
Ni100, Ni1000
Tolerance
±0.3%
±0.7%
±0.4%
±0.3%
±0.6%
±0.8%
±0.4%
±0.4%
±1.0%
Basic error limit (only valid to 120W/s)
(during temperature is 25°C, referring to input range)
Voltage input
Current input
Resistors
Resistance thermometer
Measuring range
400mV, ±4V, ±10V
1 .. 5V
0 ... 10V
±20mA
0 ... 20mA
4 ... 20mA
0 …600Ω, 0 … 3kΩ
Pt100, Pt1000
Ni100, Ni1000
Tolerance
±0.2%
±0.5%
±0.3%
±0.2%
±0.4%
±0.5%
±0.2%
±0.2%
±0.5%
Temperature error
(with reference to the input range)
measuring current
Linearity error
(with reference to the input range)
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C
referred to the input range)
±0.005%/K
±0.015%/K
±0.02%
±0.05%
Suppression of interference, limits of error output channels
Crosstalk between the outputs
> 40dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, referring to output range)
Voltage output
Current output
Measuring range
±10V
0 … 10V
1 … 5V
±20mA
0 … 20mA
4 … 20mA
Tolerance
1)
±0.4%
1)
±0.6%
1)
±0.8%
2)
±0.3%
2)
±0.6%
2)
±0.8%
continued ...
8-30
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
... continue
Basic error limit (during temperature is 25°C, referring to output range)
Measuring range
1 … 5V
0 … 10V
±10V
±20mA
0 … 20mA
4 … 20mA
Voltage output
Current output
Temperature error
(with reference to the output range)
Linearity error
(with reference to the output range)
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C
referred to the output range)
Output ripple;
range 0 to 50kHz
(referred to output range)
Tolerance
1)
±0.4%
1)
±0.3%
1)
±0.2%
2)
±0.2%
2)
±0.4%
2)
±0.5%
±0.01%/K
±0.05%
±0.05%
±0.05%
States, Alarms, Diagnosis
Diagnosis alarm
Diagnosis functions
- Sum error monitor
- Diagnostic information readable
Substitute value can be applied
parameterizable
red LED (SF)
possible
yes
Data for choosing an encoder
Voltage input
±400mV
±4V, ±10V, 1 ... 5V, 0 ... 10V
Current input
±20mA, 0 ... 20mA, 4 ... 20mA
Resistors
0...600Ω, 0...3kΩ
Resistance thermometer
Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000
Maximum input voltage for voltage
input (destruction limit)
Maximum input current for current
input (destruction limit)
Connection of the sensor
For measuring voltage
For measuring current
as 2wire transmitter
as 4wire transmitter
For measuring resistance
with 2conductor connection
Characteristic linearization
for RTD
Unit for temperature measurement
10MΩ
120kΩ
33Ω
10MΩ
10MΩ
25V
30mA
yes
possible with external power supply
yes
yes
Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000
°C
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
8-31
Chapter 8 Analog input/output modules
Manual VIPA System 200V
... continue
Data for choosing an actuator
Output ranges (rated values)
Voltage
Current
Load resistance
(in nominal range of the output)
At voltage outputs
- capacitive load
At current output
- Inductive load
Voltage outputs
Short-circuit protection
Short-circuit current
Current outputs
No-load voltage
Destruction limit against
voltages/currents applied from outside
Voltage at outputs to MANA
Current
Connection of actuators
for voltage output
for current output
1 ... 5V, 0 ... 10V, ±10V
4 ... 20mA, 0 ... 20mA, ±20mA
min. 1kΩ
max. 1µF
max. 500Ω
max. 10mH
yes
max. 31mA
max. 13V
max. 15V
max. 30mA
2conductor connection
2conductor connection
Parameter data
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
8Byte (1 Word per channel)
4Byte (1 Word per channel)
16Byte
12Byte
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
1)
2)
25.4x76x88mm
80g
The error limits are measured with a load of R=1GΩ. For voltage output the output impedance is 50Ω.
The error limits are measured with a load of R=10Ω.
8-32
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Chapter 9
SM 238C - Combination module
Overview
In this chapter follows the description of the combination module SM 238C
that includes a digital in-/output module with counter function and an
analog in-/output module.
The combination module can only be used together with a CPU 21x or with
the DP-V1 Profibus coupler (253-xDP01)! Here the max. number of
modules is limited to 2.
Below follows a description of:
• combination module SM 238C
• analog part
• digital part
• counter function
Contents
Topic
Page
Chapter 9
SM 238C - Combination module .................................... 9-1
Overview .............................................................................................. 9-2
In-/Output part ...................................................................................... 9-3
Analog part........................................................................................... 9-4
Analog part - Project engineering ......................................................... 9-7
Analog part - Alarm and diagnostic .................................................... 9-13
Digital part .......................................................................................... 9-15
Digital part - Counter - Fast introduction............................................. 9-17
Digital part - Counter - Project engineering ........................................ 9-19
Digital part - Counter - Functions........................................................ 9-24
Digital part - Counter - Operating modes............................................ 9-26
Digital part - Counter - Additional functions ........................................ 9-31
Digital part - Counter - Alarm and diagnostic...................................... 9-37
Technical Data ................................................................................... 9-40
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-1
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Overview
General
The combination module includes a digital in-/output module with counter
function and an analog in-/output module.
The following components are integrated:
• Analog input:
3xU/I, 1xPT100x12Bit
• Analog output: AO 2x12Bit COM
• Digital input:
16(12)xDC24V with parameterizable counter functions
• Digital output:: 0(4)xDC24V 1A
• Counter:
max. 3 counter with the operating modes: endless,
single or periodic counting.
Project
engineering
The combination module can only be used together with a CPU 21x or with
the DP-V1 Profibus coupler (253-xDP01)! Here the max. number of
modules is limited to 2.
The operation at a other bus coupler is not permitted.
The necessary GSD files can be found at "service" on ftp.vipa.de.
The project engineering takes place in the Siemens SIMATIC manager.
For this the import of the corresponding GSD file is required.
After installation of the GSD the combination module can be found at the
hardware catalog at:
Additional Field devices > I/O > VIPA_System_200V >...
as 2 modules:
238-2BC00 (1/2) AI4/AO2*12Bit
238-2BC00 (2/2) Counter
For the module has a digital and an analog part, you have to configure for
each one component during the hardware configuration.
Counter
The control of the counter happens via digital input channels. For the
counter you may configure alarms that influence one digital output channel
per counter.
Ordering data
DI 16xDC24V / AI 4/AO 2x12Bit Combination module
9-2
VIPA 238-2BC00
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
In-/Output part
Structure
SM 238C
+0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
F
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
4
VIPA 238-2BC00 3
Analog part
Pin assignment
Digital part
1 L+
1 L+
2
2 (A1)
V
3
4
3 (B1)
CH0
A
4 (A2)
5
5 (B2)
V
6
AI
7
6 (A3)
CH1
A
7 (B3)
DI
8
V
9
10
A
9 (L1)
CH2
DC 24V
10 (G2)
DC 24V
11
11 (L2)
CH3
12
12 (G3)
13 (L3)
13
CH4
14
AO
8 (G1)
14
15
15
CH5
16
DIO
16
17
17
18
M ANA
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
18
M
9-3
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Analog part
Properties
The analog part has 4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs that may be
configured individually. The module occupies a total of 8Byte of input and
4Byte of output data.
Galvanic isolation between the channels on the module and the backplane
bus is provided by means of DC/DC converters and opto couplers.
• 4inputs and 2 outputs with common ground
• In-/Outputs with individually configurable functions
• Channel 0 to 2 suitable for encoder with input ranges of:
voltage ±10V, 1 ... 5V, 0 ... 10V, ±4V, ±400mV
current ±20mA, 4...20mA, 0 ... 20mA
• Channel 3 suitable for encoder with input ranges of:
Pt100, Pt1000, NI100, NI1000
resistant measuring 600Ω, 3000Ω
• Channel 4 to 5 Suitable for actuators with output ranges of:
±10V, 1 ... 5V, 0 ... 10V, ±20mA, 0 ... 20mA or 4 ... 20mA
Construction
[1]
1
[2]
[3]
Label for the name of
the module
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
Status indicator
Pin assignment
LED
Pin
Description
SM 238C
F
Sum error LED (red)
turned on as soon as an
channel error is detected
res. an entry in the
diagnostic bytes happened
F
VIPA 238-2BC00
9-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
X 2
3 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
Assignment
DC 24V supply voltage
Voltage measuring Ch. 0
Current measuring Ch. 0
Ground Channel 0
Voltage measuring Ch. 1
Current measuring Ch. 1
Ground Channel 1
Voltage measuring Ch. 2
Current measuring Ch. 2
Ground channel 2
Measuring Ch. 3 (Pt, Ni, R)
Ground 3
Q0 output channel 4
M4 output channel 4
Q1 output channel 5
M5 output channel 5
Ground Supply voltage
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Circuit diagram
Circuit and
schematic
diagram
Schematic diagram
1 L+
Input / Output
2
U0
I0
V
3
CH0
33
A
4
Channel 0
U1
I1
5
V
6
33
D
CH1
A
7
AI
M0
Mux
A
U2
I2
8
33
V
9
10
DC 24V
µP
V-Bus
M2
Channel 2
R3
Ix
CH2
A
Channel 1
M1
M3
Channel 3
11
CH3
12
D
13
14
Q0
A
CH4
Channel 4
M4
AO
15
Ω
D
CH5
16
A
Q1
Channel 5
Ω
M5
17
Ω
18
M ANA
Attention!
Temporarily not used inputs have to be connected with the concerning
ground at activated channel. When deactivating unused channels by
means of FFh, this is not required.
Numeric notation
in Siemens
S7 format
The analog values are represented in two’s complement format.
Depending on the parameterized transformation speed the lowest value
bits of the measuring value are irrelevant. With increasing sampling rate,
the resolution decreases.
The following table lists the resolution in dependence of the sampling rate.
Analog value
High-Byte
Bit number
15
Resolution
sign
14
13
12
11
Low-Byte
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Measuring value
15 Bit + sign sign Relevant output value (at 3.7 ... 30Hz)
14 Bit + sign sign Relevant output value (at 60Hz)
X*
13 Bit + sign sign Relevant output value (at 120Hz)
11 Bit + sign sign Relevant output value (at 170Hz)
9 Bit + sign
sign Relevant output value (at 200Hz)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
* The lowest value irrelevant bits of the output value are marked with "X".
Algebraic sign bit
(sign)
Bit 15 serves as algebraic sign bit. Here is:
Bit 15 = "0" → positive value
Bit 15 = "1" → negative value
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-5
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Digital/Analog
conversion
Manual VIPA System 200V
In the following all measuring ranges are listed that are supported by the
analog part.
The here listed formulas allow you to transform an evaluated measuring
value (digital value) to a value assigned to the measuring range and vice
versa.
+/- 10V
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
27648
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 27648 ⋅ , U = Value ⋅
27648
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Voltage
0V
5V
10V
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
U
10
Value = 27648 ⋅ , U = Value ⋅
27648
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Voltage
1V
3V
5V
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
4
U −1 ,
U = Value ⋅
+1
Value = 27648 ⋅
27648
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Voltage
-4V
0V
4V
Decimal
-27648
0
27648
Hex
9400
0
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
U
4
Value = 27648 ⋅ , U = Value ⋅
4
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Decimal
-27648
0
27648
Hex
9400
0
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
U ,
400
Value = 27648 ⋅
U = Value ⋅
400
27648
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
I −4,
16
Value = 27648 ⋅
I = Value ⋅
+4
16
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
Decimal
0
13824
27648
Hex
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
I −4,
16
Value = 27648 ⋅
I = Value ⋅
+4
16
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
Decimal
-27648
-13824
0
13824
27648
Hex
9400
CA00
0
3600
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
I ,
20
Value = 27648 ⋅
I = Value ⋅
20
27648
I: current, Value: decimal value
Voltage
-10V
-5V
0V
5V
10V
0...10V
1...5V
+/-4V
+/-400mV
Voltage
-400mV
0V
400mV
0....20mA
Current
0mA
12mA
20mA
4....20mA
Current
4mA
12mA
20mA
+/- 20mA
Current
-20mA
-10mA
0mA
10mA
20mA
9-6
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Analog part - Project engineering
Access to the
analog part
The combination module can only be used together with a CPU 21x or with
the DP-V1 Profibus coupler (253-xDP01)! The project engineering takes
place in the Siemens SIMATIC manager. For this the import of the
corresponding GSD file is required which can be found at "service" on
ftp.vipa.de.
After installation of the GSD file the combination module can be found at
the hardware catalog at:
Additional Field devices > I/O > VIPA_System_200V > ...
as 2 modules:
238-2BC00 (1/2) AI4/AO2*12Bit
238-2BC00 (2/2) Counter
Please take care that you always configure both module parts in the
sequence shown above
Data input/
data output range
For data input 8Bytes and for data output 4Bytes are available with the
following assignment:
Data input range:
During the measuring, the measuring values are stored in the data input
area.
Byte
Bit 7 ... 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Data output range:
For output of the data you set a value in the data output area.
Byte
Bit 7 ... 0
0
High-Byte channel 4
1
Low-Byte channel 4
2
High-Byte channel 5
3
Low-Byte channel 5
Behavior at errors
As soon as a measuring value exceeds the overdrive res. underdrive
region, the following value is returned:
Measuring value > Overdrive region:
32767 (7FFFh)
Measuring value < Underdrive region: -32768 (8000h)
When exceeding the predefined range the analog output is set to 0V res. 0A!
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-7
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Parameter data
16Byte of parameter data are available for the configuration. These
parameters are stored in non-volatile memory and are available after the
unit has been powered off.
By using the SFC 55 "WR_PARM" you may alter the parameterization in
the module during runtime. The time needed until the new parameterization
is valid can last up to 50ms. During this time, the measuring value output is
7FFFFh.
The following table shows the structure of the parameter data:
Parameter area
Record set 0
Byte
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
*)
9-8
Manual VIPA System 200V
Bit 7 ... 0
Wire break recognition channel 0
Bit 0: 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Wire break recognition channel 1
Bit 1: 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Wire break recognition channel 2
Bit 2: 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Wire break recognition channel 3
Bit 3: 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
Bit 4, 5: reserved
Diagnostic alarm
Bit 6: 0 = diagnostic alarm inhibited
1 = diagnostic alarm enabled
Bit 7: reserved
Bit 3 … 0: reserved
CPU-Stop reaction for channel 4
*)
Bit 4: 0 = Set replacement value
1 = Store last value
CPU-Stop reaction for channel 5
*)
Bit 5: 0 = Set replacement value
1 = Store last value
Bit 7 ... 6: reserved
Function-no. channel 0 (see table input ranges)
Function-no. channel 1 (see table input ranges)
Function-no. channel 2 (see table input ranges)
Function-no. channel 3 (see table input ranges)
Option-Byte channel 0 (see table next page)
Option-Byte channel 1 (see table next page)
Option-Byte channel 2 (see table next page)
Option-Byte channel 3 (see table next page)
Function-no. channel 4 (see table output ranges)
Function-no. channel 5 (see table output ranges)
High-Byte replacement value channel 4
Low-Byte replacement value channel 4
High-Byte replacement value channel 5
Low-Byte replacement value channel 5
Default
00h
00h
28h
28h
28h
01h
00h
00h
00h
00h
09h
09h
00h
00h
00h
00h
If you want to get 0A res. 0V as output value at CPU-STOP, you have to set the
following replacement values at current output (4...20mA) res. voltage output (1...5V):
E500h for the S7-format from Siemens.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Parameters
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Wire break recognition
Via the Bits 0 and 3 of Byte 0, the wire break recognition is activated for the
input channels. The wire break recognition is only available for the current
measuring range of 4...20mA and at (thermo) resistance measuring. A wire
break is recognized when the current input during current measuring sinks
under 1.18mA res. when the resistance at (thermo) resistance measuring
reaches infinite. This causes an entry in the diagnostic area and is shown
via the SF-LED.
If a diagnostic alarm is activated, a diagnostic message is sent to the
superordinated system.
Diagnostic alarm
With the help of Bit 6 of Byte 0, you may release the diagnostic alarm. In
case of an error like e.g. wire break, the superordinated system receives
record 0 (4Byte). For an extended diagnostic you may then call record 1
(12Byte).More detailed information is to find below under "Diagnostic data".
CPU-Stop reaction and replacement value
With Bit 4 and 5 of Byte 1 and Byte 12 ... 15 you may set the reaction of
the module at CPU-Stop for every output channel.
Via Byte 12 ... 15 you predefine a replacement value for the output channel
as soon as the CPU switches to Stop.
By setting Bit 4 res. 5, the last output value remains in the output at CPUStop. A reset sets the replacement value.
Function No.
Here you set the function no. of your measuring res. output function for
every channel. Please see the according table above.
Meas. cycle
Here you may set the transducer velocity for every input channel. Please
regard that a higher transducer velocity causes a lower resolution because
of the lower integration time.
The data transfer format remains unchanged. Only the lower Bits (LSBs)
are not longer relevant for the analog value.
Structure Meas. cycle Byte:
Byte
Bit 7 ... 0
6 ... 7 Bit 3 ... 0: Velocity per channel
0000 15 conversions/s
0001 30 conversions/s
0010 60 conversions/s
0011 120 conversions/s
0100 170 conversions/s
0101 200 conversions/s
0110 3.7 conversions/s
0111 7.5 conversions/s
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Resolution
Default
00h
16
16
15
14
12
10
16
16
9-9
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Function-no.
assignment
Manual VIPA System 200V
The assignment of a function no. to a certain channel happens during
parameterization. The function no. 00h does not influence the function no.
stored in the permanent parameterization data.
By entering FFh you may deactivate the concerning channel.
The following tables list all functions that are supported by the depending
channel.
You may find the corresponding connection type at the "circuit diagram"
above.
Note!
When exceeding the overdrive region, the value 7FFFh (32767) is thrown,
at underrun of the underdrive region the value is 8000h (-32768).
Input range (channel 0 … 2)
No.
00h
7Dh
7Ah
Function
Measuring range / representation
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data.
Voltage 0 … 10V
-1.76 … 11.76V /
Siemens S7-format
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
0...10V= nominal range (0...27648)
-1.76V= End underdrive region (-4864)
two’s complement
Voltage 1 … 5V
0.3 … 5.70V /
Siemens S7-format
5.70V= End overdrive region (32511)
1...5V= nominal range (0...27648)
0.30V= End underdrive region (-4804)
two’s complement
28h
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S7-format
±11.76V /
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
-10...10V= nominal range (-27648...27648)
-11.76V= End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
29h
Voltage ±4V
Siemens S7-format
±4.70V /
4.70V= End overdrive region (32511)
-4...4V= nominal range (-27648...27648)
-4.70V= End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
2Ah
Voltage ±400mV
Siemens S7-format
±470mV /
470mV= End overdrive region (32511)
-400...400mV= nominal range (-27648...27648)
-470mV= End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
continued ...
9-10
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
... continue function-no. input range (channel 0…2)
7EH
Current 0 … 20mA
Siemens S7-format
-3.51 … 23.51mA /
23.51mA = End overdrive region (32511)
0...20mA = nominal range (-27648...27648)
-3.51mA = End underdrive region (-4864)
two’s complement
2Ch
Current ±20mA
Siemens S7-format
±23.51mA /
23.51mA = End overdrive region (32511)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-27648...27648)
-23.51mA = End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
2Dh
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S7-format
1.185...+22.81mA /
22.81mA = End overdrive region (32511)
4...20mA = nominal range (0...27648)
1.18mA = End underdrive region (-4864)
two’s complement
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
Input range (channel 3)
No.
00h
01h
Function
Measuring range / representation
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data.
Pt100 in 2wire mode
-200 .. +850°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
02h
Pt1000 in 2wire mode
-200 .. +500°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
03h
NI100 in 2wire mode
-50 .. +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
04h
NI1000 in 2wire mode
-50 .. +250°C /
in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
06h
Resistance measurement
600Ohm 2wire
07h
FFh
Resistance measurement
3000Ohm 2wire
-/
600Ω = Limit value (32767)
-/
3000Ω = Limit value (32767)
Channel not active (turned off)
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-11
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Output range (Channel 4, Ch. 5)
No.
00h
09h
Function
Output range
Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
Voltage ±10V
Siemens S7-format
0Ah
Voltage 1...5V
Siemens S7-format
0Dh
Voltage 0...10V
Siemens S7-format
0Bh
Current ±20mA
Siemens S7-format
0Ch
Current 4...20mA
Siemens S7-format
0Eh
Current 0...20mA
Siemens S7-format
FFh
Channel not active (turned off)
±11.76V
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
-10V...10V = nominal range (-27648...27648)
-11.76 = End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
0...5.704V
5.704V = End overdrive region (32511)
1...5V = nominal range (0...27648)
0V = End underdrive region (-6912)
two’s complement
0...11.76V
11.76V= End overdrive region (32511)
0...10V = nominal range (0...27648)
no underdrive region available
±23.52mA
23.52mA = End overdrive region (32511)
-20...20mA = nominal range (-27648...27648)
-23.52mA = End underdrive region (-32512)
two’s complement
0...22.81mA
22.81mA = End overdrive region (32511)
4...20mA = nominal range (0...27648)
0mA = End underdrive region (-6912)
two’s complement
0...23.52mA
23.52mA = End overdrive region (32511)
0...20mA = nominal range (0...27648)
no underdrive region available
Note!
When exceeding the predefined range, 0V res. 0A is shown as value!
9-12
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Analog part - Alarm and diagnostic
Diagnostic
functions
As soon as you've activated the diagnostic alarm release in the
parameterization, the following events can release a diagnostic alarm:
• Wire break
• Parameterization error
• Measuring range overflow
• Measuring range underflow
At accumulated diagnostic the CPU interrupts the user application and
branches to the OB82 for diagnostic (incoming). This OB allows you with
an according programming to monitor detailed diagnostic information via
the SFCs 51 and 59 and to react to it. After the execution of the OB82 the
user application processing is continued. The diagnostic data is consistent
until leaving the OB82.
After error correction automatically a diagnostic (going) occurs if the
diagnostic alarm release is still active.
In the following the record sets for diagnostic (incoming) and diagnostic
(going) are specified:
Record set 0
Diagnostic (incoming)
Record set 0
Diagnostic (going)
Record set 0 (Byte 0 to 3:)
Byte
Bit 7 ... 0
0
Bit 0: Module malfunction
Bit 1: reserved
Bit 2: External error
Bit 3: Channel error present
Bit 4: external supply voltage is missing
Bit 5,6: reserved
Bit 7: Wrong parameters in the module
1
Bit 3 ... 0: Module class
0101 Analog module
Bit 4: Channel information present
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
2
reserved
3
reserved
Default
00h
15h
00h
00h
After error correction automatically a diagnostic (going) occurs if the
diagnostic alarm release is still active.
Record set 0 (Byte 0 to 3:)
Byte
Bit 7 ... 0
Default
0
00h (fix)
00h
1
Bit 3 ... 0: Module class
15h
0101 Analog module
Bit 4: Channel information present
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
2
reserved
00h
3
reserved
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-13
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Record set 1
Addition diagnostic
(incoming)
Manual VIPA System 200V
The record set 1 contains the 4Byte of record set 0 and additional 8Byte
module specific diagnostic data.
The diagnostic bytes have the following assignment:
Record set 1 (Byte 0 to 11):
Byte
Bit 7 ... 0
0 ... 3 Content record set 0 (see page before)
4
Bit 6 ... 0: Channel type
70h: Digital input
71h: Analog input
72h: Digital output
73h: Analog output
74h: Analog in-/output
Bit 7: reserved
5
Number of diagnostic bits per channel
6
Number of identical channels of a module
7
Bit 0: Channel error Channel 0
Bit 1: Channel error Channel 1
Bit 2: Channel error Channel 2
Bit 3: Channel error Channel 3
Bit 4: Channel error Channel 4
Bit 5: Channel error Channel 5
Bit 7 ... 6: reserved
8
Bit 0: Wire break Channel 0
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 0
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow Channel 0
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow Channel 0
Bit 4: Wire break Channel 1
Bit 5: Parameterization error Channel 1
Bit 6: Measuring range underflow Channel 1
Bit 7: Measuring range overflow Channel 1
9
Bit 0: Wire break Channel 2
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 2
Bit 2: Measuring range underflow Channel 2
Bit 3: Measuring range overflow Channel 2
Bit 4: Wire break Channel 3
Bit 5: Parameterization error Channel 3
Bit 6: Measuring range underflow Channel 3
Bit 7: Measuring range overflow Channel 3
10
Bit 0: Wire break at current output res. short circuit
at voltage output Channel 4
Bit 1: Parameterization error Channel 4
Bit 2,3: reserved
Bit 4: Wire break at current output res. short circuit
at voltage output Channel 5
Bit 5: Parameterization error Channel 5
Bit 6,7: reserved
11
reserved
9-14
Default
74h
04h
06h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Digital part
Properties
The digital input part accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. It has
16 channels that indicate the respective status by means of LEDs.
Additionally, the first 12 inputs may control 3 counter.
• 16 inputs, isolated from the backplane bus
whereof 4 inputs are switchable as outputs
• 3 configurable counter (continuously, once and periodically)
parameterizable via the first 12 inputs / 3 counter outputs
• Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
Construction
[1]
[2]
[3]
1
Label for module description
LED status indicator
Edge connector
2
3
Status indicator
Pin assignment
LED
Assignment
Pin Counter activated
Description
L+
LED (green)
Supply voltage
available
.0...15 LEDs (green)
I.0 up to I.15
when the input
signal is "1" or
the output is
active the
respective
LED is turned
on
F
LED (red)
Overload,
overheat or
short circuit
error
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
+0
L+
.0
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Counter
deactivated
Power supply DC 24V
Input Counter (A1)
I.0 (Byte 3.0)
Input Counter (B1)
I.1 (Byte 3.1)
Input Counter (A2)
I.2 (Byte 7.0)
Input Counter (B2)
I.3 (Byte 7.1)
Input Counter (A3)
I.4 (Byte 11.0)
Input Counter (B3)
I.5 (Byte 11.1)
Input I.6: Byte 12.0: Gate 1
Input I.7: Byte 12.4: Latch 1
Input I.8: Byte 12.1: Gate 2
Input I.9: Byte 12.5: Latch 2
Input I.10: Byte 12.2: Gate 3
Input I.11: Byte 12.6: Latch 3
I/Q.12 Counter out 1 (Byte 12.0) / Input (Byte 15.0)
I/Q.13 Counter out 2 (Byte 12.1) / Input (Byte 15.1)
I/Q.14 Counter out 3 (Byte 12.2) / Input (Byte 15.2)
I/Q.15 Output (Byte 12.3) / Input (Byte 15.3)
Ground
9-15
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Wiring and
schematic
diagram
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
1 L+
Input module
2 (A1)
3 (B1)
LED
4 (A2)
Optocoupler
5 (B2)
24V DC
V-Bus
6 (A3)
Mintern
7 (B3)
DI
8 (G1)
In-/Out module
Optocoupler
9 (L1)
DC 24V
10 (G2)
11 (L2)
V-Bus Mintern
LED
DC 24V
Optocoupler
12 (G3)
13 (L3)
14
Mintern
15
DIO
16
17
18
9-16
M
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Digital part - Counter - Fast introduction
Include GSD
The combination module can only be used together with a CPU 21x or with
the DP-V1 Profibus coupler (253-xDP01)! The project engineering takes
place in the Siemens SIMATIC manager. For this the import of the
corresponding GSD file is required which can be found at "service" on
ftp.vipa.de.
After installation of the GSD file the combination module can be found at
the hardware catalog at:
Additional Field devices > I/O > VIPA_System_200V > ...
as 2 modules:
238-2BC00 (1/2) AI4/AO2*12Bit
238-2BC00 (2/2) Counter
Please take care that you always configure both module parts in the
sequence shown above
The combination module has 3 parameterizable integrated counter that are
controlled via the input channels. During the counter process, the counter
signal is registered and evaluated. Operating mode and additional
functions are set via the parameterization.
Counter preset
and parameterization
By placing both module parts within hardware configuration the counter
parameters can be set with the "238-2BC00 (2/2) Counter" properties.
The digital part has to be provided with 60Byte parameter data. Here you
define among others:
• Alarm behavior
• Assignment I/O
• Counter operating mode res. behavior
• Start value for load value, end value and comparison value register
You may alter the parameters during runtime by using the SFC 55, 56, 57
and 58, except of the parameters in record set 0. Here you have to send
the wanted parameters to the counter by means of the user application
using the according SFC and sending the data as record set.
Control counter by
commands
The controlling of the counters happens by the output image. Here the
respective counter can be controlled by commands and the software gate
can be (re-)set.
After transmitting a command, the respective counter confirms the
successful processing of the command by setting the corresponding
handshake bit. To enable the respective counter to accept a new
command, you have to transmit the command 00h to the counter. After
writing the command 00h, the handshake bit assigned to this counter will
be reset. The counter is released for a new command.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-17
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Counter start/stop
Manual VIPA System 200V
The counter is controlled via the internal gate (I-gate). The I-gate is the
result of logic operation of hardware- (HW) and Software-gate (SW), where
the HW-gate evaluation may be deactivated via the parameterization.
HW-gate: Input at Gatex-input at module
SW-gate: Open (activate):
Output image Byte 12, set Bit 4 ... 6
depending on counter
Close (deactivate): Output image Byte 12, reset Bit 4 ... 6
depending on counter
The following states influence the gates:
SW-gate
HW-gate
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
deactivated
1
deactivated
influences I-gate
0
0
0
1
0
1
Access to counter
values via input
image
The module sends back a 16Byte input image that is mapped into the
memory area of the CPU. Here the current values and states of the counter
can be found among others.
Counter inputs
(connections)
For every counter, the following inputs are available:
Pulse/A (Ax)
Pulse input for counter signal res. line A of an encoder. Here you may
connect encoders with 1-, 2- or 4-thread evaluation.
Direction/B (Bx)
Here you connect the direction signal res. line B of the encoder.
You may invert the direction signal by parameterization.
Latch (Lx)
A positive edge at the digital input „Latch“ stores the recent internal counter
value.
HW Gate (Gx)
You start the counter via the digital input „Hardware gate“.
Counter output
Every counter has an assigned output channel. You may set the following
behavior for the according output channel via the parameterization:
•
•
•
•
9-18
No comparison: Output is not called
Counter value ≥ comparison value: Output is set
Counter value ≤ comparison value: Output is set
Pulse at comparison value: Set output for a configurable pulse duration
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Digital part - Counter - Project engineering
Overview
By including the appropriate GSD into your hardware configurator the
module is available via the hardware catalog.
Please take care that you always configure both module parts in the
sequence:
238-2BC00 (1/2) AI4/AO2*12Bit
238-2BC00 (2/2) Counter
You may employ a max. of 2 combination modules at one system!
Parameterization
The parameterization happens in the hardware configurator. Here 60Byte
parameter data are transferred:
Byte
Record set Description
0 ... 2
0
Basic parameter (Alarm behavior, assignment I/O)
3 ... 21 81h (129) Counter parameter counter 1
22 ... 40 82h (130) Counter parameter counter 2
41 ... 59 83h (131) Counter parameter counter 3
By using SFC 55, 56 and 57 you may alter the parameterization in the
module during runtime. On this occasion 60Byte parameter data are stored
at record set 0, 81h, 82h and 83h.
Basic parameter
The basic parameters allow you to control the alarm behavior of the digital
part and the assignment of the I/O channels that can be accessed by the
according counter as output.
Record set 0
Byte
0
1
2
Description
Alarm generation
0 = no
1 = yes
Alarm selection
00h = None
01h = Diagnostics
02h = Process alarm
03h = Diagnostics- und Process alarm
Assignment of the in-/output channels.
Here you define the assignment of the 4 I/O channels.
If an I/O channel is used as input, you may output the status of the input via Byte 15 of
the input image.
For the operation as output, a detailed definition of the control is required in the
parameter section of the according counter.
Bit 0: 0 = Input I.12
1 = Output Q.12 / Counter output Q.12
Bit 1: 0 = Input I.13
1 = Output Q.13 / Counter output Q.13
Bit 2: 0 = Input I.14
1 = Output Q.14 / Counter output Q.14
Bit 3: 0 = Input I.15
1 = Output Q.15
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-19
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Counter parameter
Record set 81h : C1
Record set 82h : C2
Record set 83h : C3
Byte
0
1
2
3
9-20
Manual VIPA System 200V
The parameters for the counter 1 (C1) to 3 (C3) consist of 3 identical
parameter groups with each a size of 19Byte.
For every counter you may set a function and start data.
Description
Function
00h = counting continuously
01h = once without main counting direction
02h = once with main counting direction up
03h = once with main counting direction down
04h = periodically without main counting direction
05h = periodically with main counting direction up
06h = periodically with main counting direction down
07h = counter off
If the counter is deactivated, the further parameters of this counter are ignored and the
according I/O channel is set as "normal" output if you want to use this channel as
output.
At the main counting direction "up" the counter counts from the load value to the
parameterized end value in positive direction and jumps then back again to the load
value with the next following encoder pulse.
At the main counting direction "down" the counter counts from the load value to the
parameterized end value in negative direction and jumps then back again to the load
value with the next following encoder pulse.
Signal evaluation
Bit 1...0: 00b = Impulse/Direction (Impulse at A1 / Direction at B1)
01b = Rotary encoder single (at A1 and B1)
10b = Rotary encoder double (at A1 and B1)
11b = Rotary encoder quadruple (at A1 and B1)
Counter direction inverted
Bit 7:
0 =Off (Count direction at B1 not inverted)
1 = On (Count direction at B1 inverted)
Gate function (Behavior at interruption and gate restart)
Bit 0: 0 = abort (counter process starts with load value)
Bit 0: 1 = interrupt (counter process continues with counter value)
HW gate (Hardware gate via input E.6)
Bit 7: 0 = Off (Counter starts with set SW gate)
1 = On (Counter only starts with set HW and SW gate)
Behavior of the output
0 = no comparison (Output is not influenced by counter)
1 = if counter value ≥ comparison value, set output
2 = if counter value ≤ comparison value, set output
3 = gives a pulse to the output as soon as the comparison value has been reached.
The pulse duration is configured via Byte 9.
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
... continue
4
Hysteresis
0 = off
1 = off
2 ... 255: The hysteresis serves the avoidance of many toggle processes of the output
and the alarm, if the counter value is in the range of the comparison value.
5
Pulse duration (Pulse duration for the output)
0 = Counter value = comparison value (without delay)
1 = 2ms
2 = 4ms
...
255 = 510ms
Only even values are permitted.
6
Alarm masking
Bit 0: 0 = deactivated
1 = Alarm at opening the HW gate
Bit 1: 0 = deactivated
1 = Alarm at closing HW gate
Bit 2: 0 = deactivated
1 = Alarm at over-/underrun
Bit 3: 0 = deactivated
1 = Alarm at reaching comparison value
Bit 4: 0 = deactivated
1 = Alarm at counter pulse loss
7 ... 10 Load value (Presetting a load value)
Here you may load counter 1 with a value
11 ...14 End value (Presetting a end value)
The end value for counter 1 is not relevant if there is no main counting direction
defined (forwards or backwards).
15 ... 18 Compare value (Presetting a comparison value)
The counter value is compared with the comparison value and depending on that the
behavior of the according output of counter 1 is controlled.
Attention!
Please regard you have to store the record sets 81h, 82h and 83h within a
data block starting with an odd address, otherwise you have shifts and
incorrect double word accesses!
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-21
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Data to digital part
(output image)
Manual VIPA System 200V
The digital part gets its data from the CPU in form of a 16Byte data block.
The data block has the following structure:
Byte
0 ... 3
4 ... 7
8 ... 11
12
13
14
15
1)
Description
Value counter 1
Value counter 2
Value counter 3
Bit 0: Output Bit Q.12 / Release counter output 1
Bit 1: Output Bit Q.13 / Release counter output 2
Bit 2: Output Bit Q.14 / Release counter output 3
Bit 3: Output Bit Q.15
Bit 4: Software Gate counter 1
Bit 5: Software Gate counter 2
Bit 6: Software Gate counter 3
Bit 7: not evaluated
Command for counter 1
Command for counter 2
Command for counter 3
1)
The outputs may only be used as digital output if you parameterized them as "output" in the basic
parameterization.
Communication via
handshake bit
After transmitting a command, the respective counter confirms the
successful processing of the command by setting the corresponding
handshake bit. To enable the respective counter to accept a new
command, you have to transmit the command 00h to the counter. After
writing the command 00h, the handshake bit assigned to this counter will
be reset. The counter is released for a new command.
Command overview
The following commands are available:
Command Function
00h
Reset command handshake
A0h
A1h
A2h
A3h
A4h
A5h
A6h
A7h
80h
81h
82h
83h
84h
85h
86h
87h
9-22
Set counter value
Set load value
Set comparison value
Set end value
Set latch value
Set hysteresis value
Set value of pulse duration
reserved
Counter value
Load value
Comparison value
End value
Latch (display latch value)
Hysteresis value
Pulse duration value
reserved
Description
Release for a new
command (must precede
each command)
By means of these
commands, a value set
under "Value counter ..." is
transferred to the
according register of a
counter.
These commands cause
the counter to send back a
certain register value in
the input image of the
corresponding counter.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Data from digital
part (input image)
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
The module sends back a 16Byte input image that maps into the memory
area of the CPU. The structure of input data depends on counter activation:
Byte Counter activated
0 ... 3 Image counter 1
4 ... 7 Image counter 2
Counter deactivated
Byte 0 ... 2: 0
Byte 3: Bit 0: I.0
Bit 1: I.1
Byte 4 ... 6: 0
Byte 7: Bit 0: I.2
Bit 1: I.3
Byte 8 ... 10: 0
Byte 11: Bit 0: I.4
Bit 1: I.5
8 ...
11
Image counter 3
12
Gate/Latch
Bit 0: Input I.6: Status input HW gate counter 1
Bit 1: Input I.8: Status input HW gate counter 2
Bit 2: Input I.10: Status input HW gate counter 3
Bit 3: 0 (fix)
Bit 4: Input I.7: Status input Latch 1
Bit 5: Input I.9: Status input Latch 2
Bit 6: Input I.11: Status input Latch 3
Bit 7: 0 (fix)
Internal gate / last counter direction
If the counter operating mode is set to "off", these
Bits are "0".
Bit 0: Status internal gate 1
Bit 1: Status internal gate 2
Bit 2: Status internal gate 3
Bit 3: 0 (fix)
Bit 4: 0= counter direction counter 1 down
1= counter direction counter 1 up
Bit 5: 0= counter direction counter 2 down
1= counter direction counter 2 up
Bit 6: 0= counter direction counter 3 down
1= counter direction counter 3 up
Bit 7: 0 (fix)
Status of the counter outputs/command handshake
Bit 0: Status internal counter output counter 1
Bit 1: Status internal counter output counter 2
Bit 2: Status internal counter output counter 3
Bit 3: 0 (fix)
Bit 4: Status command handshake counter 1
Bit 5: Status command handshake counter 2
Bit 6: Status command handshake counter 3
Bit 7: 0 (fix)
Status inputs
If the channel is set as output, the according Bit is "0"
Bit 0: Status input I.12
Bit 1: Status input I.13
Bit 2: Status input I.14
Bit 3: Status input I.15
Bit 7 ... 4: 0 (fix)
13
14
15
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
0
0
9-23
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Digital part - Counter - Functions
Operating modes
The combination module has 3 parameterizable integrated counter that are
controlled via the input channels. During the counter process, the counter
signal is registered and evaluated. Operating mode and additional
functions are set via the parameterization.
For the counter, the following operating modes are available:
• Count endless – Distance measuring with incremental encoder
• Count once – Count to a maximum limit
• Count periodic– Count with repeated counter process
The operating modes "Count once" and "Count periodic“ allow you to
transfer the counter area as start res. end value via the parameterization.
Each counter is parameterizable with additional functions like gate function,
latch function, comparison, hysteresis an process alarm.
Counter inputs
(connections)
For every counter, the following inputs are available:
Pulse/A (Ax)
Pulse input for counter signal res. line A of an encoder. Here you may
connect encoders with 1-, 2- or 4-thread evaluation.
Direction/B (Bx)
Here you connect the direction signal res. line B of the encoder.
You may invert the direction signal by parameterization.
Latch (Lx)
A positive edge at the digital input „Latch“ stores the recent internal counter
value.
HW Gate (Gx)
You start the counter via the digital input „Hardware gate“.
Counter output
Every counter has an assigned output channel. You may set the following
behavior for the according output channel via the parameterization:
•
•
•
•
9-24
No comparison: Output is not called
Counter value ≥ comparison value: Output is set
Counter value ≤ comparison value: Output is set
Pulse at comparison value: Set output for a configurable pulse duration
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Maximum
counter frequency
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
At the designation of maximum counter frequency, two types of indication
are distinguished:
• Maximum pulse frequency
The maximum pulse frequency is the maximum frequency the adjacent
signal may have, i.e. the maximum frequency at witch the pulses arrive
at the module. At this module the maximum pulse frequency depends on
the counter-signal-evaluation chosen.
Signal evaluation
Maximum pulse frequency
single
30kHz
duplicate
15kHz
quaduplicate
7.5kHz
• Maximum counter frequency
The maximum counter frequency is the frequency at witch can be
internally counted to the maximum.
At employment of all 3 counters, every counter may use a frequency of
max. 30kHz. If you employ only 1 counter channel, the counter supports
a max. frequency of 100kHz.
Main counting
direction
The parameterization allows you to define a main counting direction for
every counter.
If you choose "none", the complete counting range is available:
Lower count limit
Upper count limit
Valid value range
- 2 147 483 648 (-231)
+ 2 147 483 647 (231-1)
Main counting direction forward
Upper restriction of the count range. The counter counts 0 res. load value
in positive direction until the parameterized end value –1 and jumps then
back to the load value with the next following encoder pulse.
Main counting direction backwards
Lower restriction of the count range. The counter counts from the
parameterized start- res. load value in negative direction to the
parameterized end value +1 and jumps then back to the start value with the
next following encoder pulse.
Abort interrupt
Abort count process
The count process starts after closing and restart of the gate beginning
with the load value.
Interrupt count process
The count process continuous after closing and restart of the gate
beginning with the last recent counter value.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-25
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Digital part - Counter - Operating modes
Overview
For the counter, the following operating modes are available separate
configurable:
• Count endless – Distance measuring with incremental encoder
• Count once – Count to a maximum limit
• Count periodic– Count with repeated counter process
Continuously
In this operating mode, the counter counts from 0 res. from the load value.
When the counter counts forward and reaches the upper count limit and
another counting pulse in positive direction arrives, it jumps to the lower
count limit and counts from there on.
When the counter counts backwards and reaches the lower count limit and
another counting pulse in negative direction arrives, it jumps to the upper
count limit and counts from there on.
The count limits are set to the maximum count range.
Lower count limit
Upper count limit
Counter value
Load value
Valid value range
- 2 147 483 648 (-231)
+ 2 147 483 647 (231-1)
- 2 147 483 648 (-231) to + 2 147 483 647 (231-1)
31
31
- 2 147 483 647 (-2 +1) to + 2 147 483 646 (2 -2)
counter value
upper
counter limit
overflow
load value
0
lower
counter limit
underflow
time
gate start
gate stop
Note!
When counting continuously the parameter main counting direction is
ignored!
9-26
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Once
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
No main counting direction
• The counter counts once starting with the load value.
• You may count forward and backwards.
• The count limits are set to the maximum count range.
• At over- or underrun at the count limits, the counter jumps to the
according other count limit and counts from there on. The gate is
automatically closed.
• To restart the count process, you must create a positive edge of the
gate.
• At interrupting gate control, the count process continuous with the last
recent counter value.
• At aborting gate control, the counter starts with the load value.
Lower count limit
Upper count limit
Counter value
Load value
Valid value range
- 2 147 483 648 (-231)
+ 2 147 483 647 (231-1)
- 2 147 483 648 (-231) to + 2 147 483 647 (231-1)
31
31
- 2 147 483 647 (-2 +1) to + 2 147 483 646 (2 -2)
Interrupting gate control:
counter value
upper
counter limit
overflow
load value
0
lower
counter limit
underflow
time
gate start
gate stop gate start
automatically
gate stop
automatically
Aborting gate control:
counter value
upper
counter limit
overflow
load value
0
lower
counter limit
underflow
gate start
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
gate stop gate start
automatically
gate stop
automatically
time
9-27
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Main counting direction forward
• The counter counts starting with the load value.
• When the counter reaches the end value –1 in positive direction, it
jumps to the load value at the next positive count pulse and the gate is
automatically closed.
• To restart the count process, you must create a positive edge of the
gate. The counter starts with the load value.
End value
Lower count limit
Counter value
Load value
Valid value range
31
31
- 2 147 483 646 (-2 +1) to + 2 147 483 646 (2 -1)
31
- 2 147 483 648 (-2 )
- 2 147 483 648 (-231) to end value -1
31
- 2 147 483 648 (-2 ) to end value -2
counter value
overflow
end value
load value
0
lower
counter limit
underflow
gate start
gate stop gate start
automatically
time
gate stop
automatically
Main counting direction backwards
• The counter counts starting with the load value.
• When the counter reaches the end value in negative direction, it jumps
to the load value at the next negative count pulse and the gate is
automatically closed.
• To restart the count process, you must create a positive edge of the
gate. The counter starts with the load value.
End value
Upper count limit
Counter value
Load value
Valid value range
31
31
- 2 147 483 646 (-2 +1) to + 2 147 483 646 (2 -1)
+2 147 483 646 (231-1)
- 2 147 483 646 (-231+1) to + 2 147 483 646 (-231-1)
- 2 147 483 646 (-231+1) to + 2 147 483 646 (-231-1)
counter value
upper
counter limit
load value
end value
0
time
gate start
9-28
gate stop gate start
automatically
gate stop
automatically
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Periodically
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
No main counting direction:
• The counter counts starting with the load value.
• At over- or underrun at the count limits, the counter jumps to the
according other count limit and counts from there on.
• The count limits are set to the maximum count range.
Lower count limit
Upper count limit
Counter value
Load value
Valid value range
31
- 2 147 483 648 (-2 )
31
+ 2 147 483 647 (2 -1)
- 2 147 483 648 (-231) to + 2 147 483 647 (231-1)
- 2 147 483 647 (-231+1) to + 2 147 483 646 (231-2)
counter value
upper
counter limit
overflow
load value
0
lower
counter limit
underflow
time
gate start
gate stop
Main counting direction forward
• The counter counts starting with the load value.
• When the counter reaches the end value –1 in positive direction, it
jumps to the load value at the next positive count pulse.
Limit value
Lower count limit
Counter value
Load value
Valid value range
- 2 147 483 647 (-231+1) to + 2 147 483 647 (231-1)
- 2 147 483 648 (-231)
- 2 147 483 648 (-231) to end value -1
- 2 147 483 648 (-231) to end value -2
counter value
end value
overflow
Load value
0
lower
counter limit
underflow
time
gate start
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
gate stop
9-29
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Main counting direction backwards
• The counter counts starting with the load value.
• When the counter reaches the end value in negative direction, it jumps
to the load value at the next negative count pulse.
• You may exceed the upper count limit.
Limit value
Upper count limit
Counter value
Load value
Valid value range
31
31
- 2 147 483 647 (-2 +1) to + 2 147 483 647 (2 -1)
+2 147 483 647 (231-1)
- 2 147 483 647 (-231+1) to +2 147 483 647 (231-1)
- 2 147 483 647 (-231+1) to +2 147 483 647 (231-1)
counter value
upper
counter limit
load value
end value
0
time
gate start
9-30
gate stop
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Digital part - Counter - Additional functions
Overview
The additional functions listed in the following can be set for every counter
via the parameterization:
• Gate function
The gate function serves the start, stop and interruption of a counter
function
• Latch function
As soon as a positive edge is registered at the latch input, a recent
counter value is stored in the latch register.
• Comparison
You may set a comparison value that activates a digital output res.
throws a process alarm depending on the recent counter value.
• Hysteresis
By setting a hysteresis you may prevent a continuous toggling of an
output if the value of an encoder signal fluctuates around a comparison
value.
• Alarm
For the following events you may parameterize an alarm:
- status change of the HW gate
- Over- res. underrun
- Reaching a comparison value
- Loss of a counter pulse
Schematic structure
The illustration shows how the additional functions influence the counter
behavior. The following pages give you a more detailed explanation of the
additional functions:
HW-Gate
SW-Gate
Impulse/Spur A
Direction/Spur B
Latch
Internal Gate
Impulse evaluation
Load value
Compare value
Counter value
Latch
R
e
l
e
a
s
e
Process
alarm
Compare
Hysteresis
Output
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-31
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Gate function
Manual VIPA System 200V
The counter is controlled via the internal gate (I-gate). The I-gate is the
result of logic operation of hardware- (HW) and Software-gate (SW), where
the HW-gate evaluation may be deactivated via the parameterization.
HW-gate: Input at Gatex-input at module
SW-gate: Open (activate):
Output image Byte 12, set Bit 4 ... 6
depending on counter
Close (deactivate): Output image Byte 12, reset Bit 4 ... 6
depending on counter
The following states influence the gates:
SW-gate
HW-gate
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
deactivated
1
deactivated
influences I-gate
0
0
0
1
0
1
Gate function Abort and Interrupt
The parameterization defines if the gate interrupts or aborts the counter
process.
• At abort function the counter starts counting with the load value after
gate restart.
counter value
load value
time
gate start
gate stop
gate start
• At interrupt function, the counter starts counting with the last recent
counter value after gate restart.
counter value
load value
time
gate start
9-32
gate stop
gate start
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Latch function
As soon as a positive edge at the "latch input" results from the counter
process, a recent counter value is stored in the according latch register.
The "input image" gives you access to the latch register.
Compare function
The parameterization presets the behavior of the counter output:
• No comparison
• Counter value ≥ comparison value
• Counter value ≤ comparison value
• Pulse at comparison value
No comparison
The output is set like a normal output.
Counter value ≥ comparison value
If the counter value is equal or higher than the comparison value, the
output is set.
Counter value ≤ comparison value
If the counter value is smaller or equal than the comparison value, the
output is set.
Pulse at comparison value
When the counter reaches the comparison value, the output is set active
for the parameterized pulse duration.
If you've set a main counter direction, the output is only set off the main
counter direction at reaching the comparison value.
Pulse duration
The pulse duration tells for what time the output is set. It can be preset in
steps of 2ms between 0 and 510ms. Please regard that the counter pulse
times must be higher than the minimum toggle times of the digital output.
If the pulse duration = 0, the output is set active until the comparison
condition is not longer fulfilled.
The pulse duration starts with the setting of the according digital output.
The inaccuracy of the pulse duration is smaller than 1ms.
There is no finish triggering of the pulse duration if the comparison value is
not met for a short time during a pulse output.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-33
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
The hysteresis serves the avoidance of many toggle processes of the
output and the alarm, if the counter value is in the range of the comparison
value.
You may set a range of 0 to 255. The settings 0 and 1 deactivate the
hysteresis. The hysteresis also influences the over- and underflow.
An activated hysteresis remains active after a change. The new hysteresis
range is taken over at the next reach of the comparison value.
The view below shows the action of the at hysteresis 0 and 3
In the following illustration the behavior of the output is represented with
hysteresis 0 and hysteresis 3 for the appropriate conditions:
Hysteresis
Action when Counter value ≥ Comparison value
Counter value
8
7
6
Comparison
5
value
4
3
2
1
0
Hysteresis
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
Output:
Hysteresis = 0
Hysteresis = 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Counter value ≥ Comparison value → Output is set and hysteresis is activated
Leaving the hysteresis area → Output is reset
Counter value ≥ Comparison value → Output is set and hysteresis is activated
Leaving the hysteresis area, output is just set as Counter value ≥ Comparison value
Counter value < Comparison value an hysteresis not activated → Output is reset
Counter value ≥ Comparison value → Output is set and hysteresis is activated
Leaving the hysteresis area, output is just set as Counter value ≥ Comparison value
As reaching the comparison condition the hysteresis is activated. The
comparison result is as static as the counter value leaves the
parameterized hysteresis area.
After leaving the hysteresis area only again with reaching comparison
condition the hysteresis is activated.
9-34
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Action at pulse at comparison value and Pulse width equal to zero
Counter value
8
7
6
Comparison
5
value
4
3
2
1
0
Hysteresis
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
Output:
Hysteresis = 0
Hysteresis = 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Counter value = Comparison value → Output is set and hysteresis is activated
Leaving the hysteresis area → Output is reset
Counter value = Comparison value → Output is set and hysteresis is activated
Counter value > Comparison value and leaving the hysteresis area so output is reset
Counter value = Comparison value → Output is set and hysteresis is activated
Counter value = Comparison value and hysteresis is just activated → Output is static set
Leaving the hysteresis area and Counter value > Comparison value → Output is reset
As reaching the comparison condition the hysteresis is activated. The
comparison result is as static as the counter value leaves the
parameterized hysteresis area.
After leaving the hysteresis area only again with reaching comparison
condition the hysteresis is activated.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-35
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Action at pulse at comparison value and Pulse width not equal to zero
Counter value
8
7
6
Comparison
5
value
4
3
2
1
0
Hysteresis
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
Output:
Hysteresis = 0
Hysteresis = 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Counter value = Comparison value → Hysteresis is switched active, a pulse of the specified
length is output and the counting direction is stored
Leaving the hysteresis area against the stored counter direction → A pulse of the specified length
is output and the hysteresis deactivated
Counter value = Comparison value → Hysteresis is switched active, a pulse of the specified
length is output and the counting direction is stored
Leaving Hysteresis area without changing counting direction → Hysteresis is deactivated
Counter value = Comparison value → Hysteresis is switched active, a pulse of the specified
length is output and the counting direction is stored
Counter value = Comparison value and hysteresis is activated → no pulse
Leaving the hysteresis area against the stored counting direction → A pulse of the specified
length is output and the hysteresis deactivated
As reaching the comparison condition the hysteresis is activated and a
pulse of the specified length is output. As long as the counter value is
within the hysteresis area no further pulse is output. With hysteresis
activation the counting direction is stored by the PLC.
If the counter value leaves the hysteresis area against the stored counting
direction, an impulse of the of the specified length is output. When leaving
the hysteresis area without change of counter direction there is no pulse
output.
9-36
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Digital part - Counter - Alarm and diagnostic
Overview
The parameterization allows you to define the following trigger for a
process alarm:
• Status change of the HW gate
• Over- / Underflow
• Reaching a comparison value
• Loss of a counter pulse
You may globally activate a diagnostic alarm for all channels. A diagnostic
alarm occurs as soon as at processing a process alarm a process alarm is
initialized in OB40 for the same channel and the same event.
Process alarm
A process alarm causes the call of OB40. Within the OB40 you may search
the logical basic address of the module that threw the process alarm by
using the local word 6.
The local word 8 allows you to access the data that the module provides in
case of an alarm. The local word 8 has the following structure:
Local word
8
Release
diagnostic
alarm
Bit
4...0: Alarm data Channel 0
Bit 0: HW gate open
Bit 1: HW gate closed
Bit 2: Overflow
Bit 3: Comparison value reached
Bit 4: Pulse lost
9...5: Alarm data Channel 1
Bit 5: HW gate open
Bit 6: HW gate closed
Bit 7: Overflow
Bit 8: Comparison value reached
Bit 9: Pulse lost
14...10: Alarm data Channel 2
Bit 10: HW gate open
Bit 11: HW gate closed
Bit 12: Overflow
Bit 13: Comparison value reached
Bit 14: Pulse lost
15: reserved
During a process alarm is processed by the PLC in OB40 a diagnostic alarm
can be released (if activated) by the same event at the same channel.
This interrupts the current process alarm execution in OB40 and branches to
OB82 for processing the diagnostic alarm (incoming). If during the
diagnostic alarm execution further events at other channels occur that may
also initialize a process res. diagnostic alarm, these are temporarily stored.
After finishing the current diagnostic alarm execution, the sum diagnostic
message "process alarm lost" informs the CPU that in the meantime other
process alarms has occurred.
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-37
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Diagnostic alarm
As soon as you've activated the diagnostic alarm a diagnostic alarm occurs
during the processing a process alarm in OB40 for the same channel and the
same event.
At accumulated diagnostic the CPU interrupts the user application and
branches to the OB82 for diagnostic (incoming). This OB allows you with
an according programming to monitor detailed diagnostic information via
the SFCs 51 and 59 and to react to it.
After the execution of the OB82 the user application processing is
continued. The diagnostic data is consistent until leaving the OB82.
After error correction automatically a diagnostic (going) occurs if the
diagnostic alarm release is still active.
In the following the record sets for diagnostic (incoming) and diagnostic
(going) are specified:
Record set 0
Record set 0 (Byte 0 to 3):
Byte
Bit 7 ... 0
0
Bit 0: Module malfunction
Bit 1: internal error
Bit 2: reserved
Bit 3: channel error present
Bit 7 ... 4: reserved
1
Bit 3 ... 0: Module class
1000: Function module
Bit 4: Channel information present
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
2
00h (fix)
3
Bit 5 ... 0: reserved
Bit 6: process alarm lost
Bit 7: reserved
Diagnostic (incoming)
Record set 0
Diagnostic (going)
9-38
Default
00h
18h
00h
00h
After error correction automatically a diagnostic (going) occurs if the
diagnostic alarm release is still active.
Record set 0 (Byte 0 to 3:)
Byte
Bit 7 ... 0
Default
0
00h (fix)
00h
1
Bit 3 ... 0: Module class
18h
1000: Function module
Bit 4: Channel information present
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
2
00h (fix)
00h
3
00h (fix)
00h
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Record set 1
Extended diagnostic
(incoming)
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Byte 0 to 11:
The record set 1 contains the 4Byte of the record set 0 and additionally
8Byte of module specific diagnostic data.
Record set 1 (Byte 0 to 11):
Byte
Bit 7 ... 0
0 ... 3 Content record set 0 (see page before)
4
Bit 6 ... 0: Channel type
76h: Counter
Bit 7: reserved
5
Number of diagnostic bits per channel
6
Number of similar channels (Counter)
7
Bit 0: Channel error channel 0
Bit 1: Channel error channel 1
Bit 2: Channel error channel 2
Bit 7 ... 3: reserved
8
Error screen channel 0
Bit 0: HW gate open
Bit 1: HW gate closed
Bit 2: Overflow
Bit 3: Comparison value reached
Bit 4: Pulse lost
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
9
Error screen channel 1
Bit 0: HW gate open
Bit 1: HW gate closed
Bit 2: Overflow
Bit 3: Comparison value reached
Bit 4: Pulse lost
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
10
Error screen channel 2
Bit 0: HW gate open
Bit 1: HW gate closed
Bit 2: Overflow
Bit 3: Comparison value reached
Bit 4: Pulse lost
Bit 7 ... 5: reserved
11
reserved
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Default
76h
08h
03h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
9-39
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
Technical Data
General
Dimensions and weight
238-2BC00
Current consumption via back plane bus
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
Weight
280mA
50.8x76x88mm
100g
Analog In-/Output
Electrical Data
VIPA 238-2BC00 (1/2) AI4/AO2*12Bit
Number of Current-/Voltage input
Number of resistance input
Number of outputs
Length of cable: shielded
3
1
2
200m
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Supply voltage
- reverse polarity protection
Constant current for resistance-type
sensor
Isolation
- channels / backplane bus
- channel / power supply of the
electronic
- between the channels
Permitted potential difference
- between the inputs (UCM)
- between the inputs and MINTERNAL
(UISO)
Isolation tested with
Current consumption
- from the power supply L+
Power dissipation of the module
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
yes
1.25mA
Analog value calculation input
Conversion time/Resolution (per channel)
Measuring principle
Parameterizable
Conversion rate (Hz)
Integration time (ms)
Basic conversion time (ms)
Resolution (Bit) incl. overrange
Noise suppression for frequency f1 (Hz)
Basic execution time of the module, in
ms (all channels enabled)
Smoothing of the measured values
Sigma-Delta
Yes
200
170
5
6
7
8
10
12
no
28
32
yes
yes
no
DC 4V
DC 75V/AC 60V
DC 500V
60mA (no load)
2W
120
8
10
14
60
17
19
15
30
33
35
16
40
76
140
15
7.5
67
133
69
135
16
16
50 and 60Hz
276
540
3.7
270
272
16
1088
none
Analog value calculation output
channels
Resolution (incl. overrange)
±10V, ±20mA
4 ... 20mA, 1 ... 5V
0 ... 10V, 0 ... 20mA
Conversion time (per channel)
Settling time
impedance load
capacitive load
inductive load
11Bit + sign
10Bit
11Bit
1.5ms
0.3ms
1.0ms
0.5ms
continued ...
9-40
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
... continue
Suppression of interference, limits of error input channels
Noise suppression for f=n x (f1 ±1%) (f1=interference frequency, n=1,2,...)
Common-mode interference
> 80dB
(UCM < 5V)
Series-mode noise (peak value of noise > 80dB
< nominal value of input range
Crosstalk between the inputs
> 50dB
Operational limit (only valid to 120W/s)
(in the entire temperature range, referring to input range)
voltage input
current input
Resistors
Resistance thermometer
Measuring range
±400mV, ±4V, ±10V
1 ... 5V
0 ... 10V
±20mA
0 ... 20mA
4 ... 20mA
0 … 600Ω, 0 …3kΩ
Pt100, Pt1000
Ni100, Ni1000
Tolerance
±0.3%
±0.7%
±0.4%
±0.3%
±0.6%
±0.8%
±0.4%
±0.4%
±1.0%
Basic error limit (only valid to 120W/s)
(during temperature is 25°C, referring to input range)
Voltage input
Current input
Resistors
Resistance thermometer
Measuring range
400mV, ±4V, ±10V
1 .. 5V
0 ... 10V
±20mA
0 ... 20mA
4 ... 20mA
0 …600Ω, 0 … 3kΩ
Pt100, Pt1000
Ni100, Ni1000
Tolerance
±0.2%
±0.5%
±0.3%
±0.2%
±0.4%
±0.5%
±0.2%
±0.2%
±0.5%
Temperature error
(with reference to the input range)
measuring current
Linearity error
(with reference to the input range)
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C
referred to the input range)
±0.005%/K
±0.015%/K
±0.02%
±0.05%
Suppression of interference, limits of error output channels
Crosstalk between the outputs
> 40dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, referring to output range)
Voltage output
Current output
Measuring range
±10V
0 … 10V
1 … 5V
±20mA
0 … 20mA
4 … 20mA
Tolerance
1)
±0.4%
1)
±0.6%
1)
±0.8%
2)
±0.3%
2)
±0.6%
2)
±0.8%
continued ...
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
9-41
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
Manual VIPA System 200V
... continue
Basic error limit (during temperature is 25°C, referring to output range)
Measuring range
1 … 5V
0 … 10V
±10V
±20mA
0 … 20mA
4 … 20mA
Voltage output
Current output
Temperature error
(with reference to the output range)
Linearity error
(with reference to the output range)
Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C
referred to the output range)
Output ripple;
range 0 to 50kHz
(referred to output range)
Tolerance
1)
±0.4%
1)
±0.3%
1)
±0.2%
2)
±0.2%
2)
±0.4%
2)
±0.5%
±0.01%/K
±0.05%
±0.05%
±0.05%
States, Alarms, Diagnostic
Diagnostic alarm
Diagnostic functions
- Sum error monitor
- Diagnostic information readable
Substitute value can be applied
parameterizable
red LED (SF)
possible
yes
Data for choosing an encoder
Voltage input
±400mV
±4V, ±10V, 1 ... 5V, 0 ... 10V
Current input
±20mA, 0 ... 20mA, 4 ... 20mA
Resistors
0...600Ω, 0...3kΩ
Resistance thermometer
Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000
Maximum input voltage for voltage
input (destruction limit)
Maximum input current for current
input (destruction limit)
Connection of the sensor
For measuring voltage
For measuring current
as 2wire transmitter
as 4wire transmitter
For measuring resistance
with 2conductor connection
Characteristic linearization
for RTD
10MΩ
120kΩ
33Ω
10MΩ
10MΩ
25V
30mA
yes
possible with external power supply
yes
yes
Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000
continued ...
9-42
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
... continue
Data for choosing an actuator
Output ranges (rated values)
Voltage
Current
Load resistance
(in nominal range of the output)
At voltage outputs
- capacitive load
At current output
- Inductive load
Voltage outputs
Short-circuit protection
Short-circuit current
Current outputs
No-load voltage
Destruction limit against
voltages/currents applied from outside
Voltage at outputs to MANA
Current
Connection of actuators
for voltage output
for current output
±10V, 1 ... 5V, 0 ... 10V
±20mA, 0 ... 20mA, 4 ... 20mA
min. 1kΩ
max. 1µF
max. 500Ω
max. 10mH
yes
max. 31mA
max. 13V
max. 15V
max. 30mA
2conductor connection
2conductor connection
Parameter data
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
1)
2)
8Byte (1 Word per channel)
4Byte (1 Word per channel)
16Byte
12Byte
The error limits are measured with a load of R=1GΩ. For voltage output the output impedance is 50Ω.
The error limits are measured with a load of R=10Ω.
Digital Input
Elektrical Data
VIPA 238-2BC00 (2/2) Counter
Number of inputs
Counter
Nominal input voltage
Signal voltage "0"
Signal voltage "1"
Input filter time delay
Input filter pulse input
Maximum counter frequency
Input current
Supply voltage
Isolation
Status monitor
16
3 (2 inputs each A, B)
DC 24V (20.4 ... 28.8V)
0 ... 5V
15 ... 28.8V
3ms
100µs
30kHz
typ. 7mA
5V via backplane bus
500Veff (field voltage - backplane bus)
via LEDs at the front side
Parameter data
Input data
Output data
Parameter data
Diagnostic data
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
16Byte
16Byte
60Byte
12Byte
9-43
Chapter 9 SM 238C - Combination module
9-44
Manual VIPA System 200V
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Manual VIPA System 200V
Index
Appendix
A Index
A
Alarm input.................................... 3-8
Analog in-/output modules ............ 8-1
234-1BD50................................ 8-4
Diagnostics ........................ 8-14
Function-no. ......................... 8-8
Parameter ............................ 8-6
234-1BD60.............................. 8-18
Diagnostics ........................ 8-27
Function-no. ....................... 8-23
Parameter .......................... 8-21
connecting actuators ................ 8-3
connecting sensor .................... 8-3
Runtime
Diagnostics .......................... 8-3
Parameter ............................ 8-3
Security notes ....................8-2, 8-3
System overview....................... 8-2
Analog input modules ................... 6-1
231-1BD30................................ 6-6
Function-no. ......................... 6-8
Parameter ............................ 6-8
231-1BD40.............................. 6-11
Function-no. ....................... 6-13
Parameter .......................... 6-12
231-1BD52.............................. 6-16
Diagnostics ........................ 6-24
Function-no. ....................... 6-18
Parameter .......................... 6-22
231-1BD53.............................. 6-25
Diagnostics ........................ 6-34
Function-no. ....................... 6-27
Parameter .......................... 6-31
231-1BD60.............................. 6-39
231-1BD70.............................. 6-42
231-1BF00 .............................. 6-45
Diagnostics ........................ 6-52
Function-no. ....................... 6-48
Parameter .......................... 6-50
231-1FD00.............................. 6-55
Diagnostics ........................ 6-61
Function-no. ....................... 6-57
Parameter .......................... 6-59
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Process alarm.................... 6-63
connect sensor ......................... 6-3
Runtime
Diagnostics .......................... 6-3
Parameter ............................ 6-3
System overview ...................... 6-2
Analog output modules................. 7-1
232-1BD30 ............................... 7-6
Function-no.......................... 7-8
Parameter ............................ 7-8
232-1BD40 ............................. 7-11
Function-no........................ 7-13
Parameter .......................... 7-13
232-1BD51 ............................. 7-16
Diagnostics ........................ 7-18
Function-no........................ 7-19
Parameter .......................... 7-18
connecting actuators ................ 7-3
Runtime
Diagnostics .......................... 7-3
Parameter ............................ 7-3
System overview ...................... 7-2
C
Combination module SM238C ..... 9-1
Analog part ............................... 9-4
Alarm ................................. 9-13
conversion ........................... 9-6
Diagnostic alarm .................. 9-9
Diagnostics ........................ 9-13
Function-no........................ 9-10
Meas. cycle .......................... 9-9
Numeric notation.................. 9-5
Parameter ............................ 9-8
Pin assignment .................... 9-4
Project engineering.............. 9-7
Replacement value .............. 9-9
Resolution............................ 9-5
Wire break ........................... 9-9
Digital part .............................. 9-15
Counter .............................. 9-17
abort ............................ 9-25
additional functions...... 9-31
Alarm ........................... 9-37
Commands .................. 9-22
A-1
Index
Manual VIPA System 200V
Compare functions ...... 9-33
continuously................. 9-26
Diagnostics .................. 9-37
Fast introduction .......... 9-17
Functions ..................... 9-24
Gate functions.............. 9-32
Hysteresis .................... 9-34
Input image .................. 9-23
interrupt........................ 9-25
Latch function .............. 9-33
main counting direction 9-25
max frequency ............. 9-25
once ............................. 9-27
Operatimg modes ........ 9-26
Output image ............... 9-22
Parameter .................... 9-19
periodically................... 9-29
Pin assignment ............ 9-15
Pulse duration.............. 9-33
Pin assignment .................. 9-15
Overview................................... 9-2
Pin assignment ......................... 9-3
Technical data ........................ 9-40
Counter ..............................3-34, 9-17
D
Digital in-/output modules ............. 5-1
223-1BF00 ................................ 5-3
223-2BL10 ................................ 5-5
Security hints ............................ 5-2
System overview....................... 5-2
Digital input modules .................... 3-1
221-1BF00 ................................ 3-4
221-1BF10 ................................ 3-6
221-1BF20 ................................ 3-8
221-1BF30 .............................. 3-10
221-1BF50 .............................. 3-12
221-1BH00.............................. 3-24
221-1BH10.............................. 3-26
221-1BH20.............................. 3-28
Counter .............................. 3-30
Functions ..................... 3-34
Deployment ........................ 3-32
Frequency measurement ... 3-35
Period measurement.......... 3-36
221-1BH30.............................. 3-38
221-1BH50.............................. 3-40
221-1FD00.............................. 3-14
221-1FF20 .............................. 3-16
221-1FF30 .............................. 3-18
221-1FF40 .............................. 3-20
221-1FF50 .............................. 3-22
221-2BL10.............................. 3-42
System overview ...................... 3-2
Digital output modules .................. 4-1
222-1BF00................................ 4-4
222-1BF10................................ 4-6
222-1BF20................................ 4-8
222-1BF30.............................. 4-10
222-1BH00 ............................. 4-12
222-1BH10 ............................. 4-14
222-1BH20 ............................. 4-16
222-1BH30 ............................. 4-18
222-1BH50 ............................. 4-20
222-1FD10 ............................. 4-32
222-1FF00.............................. 4-30
222-1HD10 ............................. 4-26
222-1HD20 ............................. 4-28
222-1HF00 ............................. 4-24
222-2BL10.............................. 4-22
System overview ...................... 4-2
S
S5 format from Siemens ....... 6-4, 7-4
S7 format from Siemens ....... 6-5, 7-5
System 200V
Assembly........................... 2-1, 2-5
dimensions......................... 2-10
Basics....................................... 1-1
Bus connector .......................... 2-2
Centralized system ................... 1-4
Components ............................. 1-4
Decentralized system ............... 1-4
Disturbances .......................... 2-12
EMC ....................................... 2-12
Basic rules ......................... 2-13
Environmental conditions ......... 1-5
Installation guidelines ............. 2-12
Overview............................ 1-3, 1-5
Peripheral modules .................. 1-4
Profile rail ................................. 2-2
Project engineering .................. 1-4
Reliability .................................. 1-5
Removal ................................... 2-7
Safety Information .................... 1-2
Screening of cables................ 2-14
Wiring ....................................... 2-8
U
UB4x.........................3-25, 3-41, 4-13
M.Stich
A-2
HB97E - SM - Rev. 06/29
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement